COMBINED CONTRACT MARCH 30, NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Amend the Project Manual and Drawings to the above referenced project as follows: PROJECT MANUAL

Transcription

1 ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM DLR GROUP PROJECT NO COMBINED CONTRACT MARCH 30, 2018 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Amend the Project Manual and Drawings to the above referenced project as follows: PROJECT MANUAL ITEM NO. 1. DOCUMENT TABLE O CONTENTS A. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section HANGERS AND SUPPORTS. B. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING. C. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS. D. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING. E. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section SEQUENCE O OPERATIONS. G. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section METAL DUCTS. H. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add SECTION PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS. I. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add SECTION INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS. ITEM NO. 2. SECTION UNIT MASONRY A. Article 1.9. Delete the following 1) Standard Pattern, split-face finish B. Article 1.9. Add the following 1) Standard Pattern, split-face finish; smooth face finish at top course in contact with parapet coping ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 CC-1-1

2 ITEM NO. 3. SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 1. ITEM NO. 4. SECTION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 2. ITEM NO. 5. SECTION DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 3. ITEM NO. 6. SECTION CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 4. ITEM NO. 7. SECTION HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 5. ITEM NO. 8. SECTION SEQUENCE O OPERATIONS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 6. ITEM NO. 9. SECTION METAL DUCTS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 7. ITEM NO. 10. SECTION PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 8. ITEM NO. 11. SECTION INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS A. Add Section , per Attachment No. 9. DRAWINGS ITEM NO. 1. DRAWING A0.1 GENERAL NOTES, ROOM INISH SCHEDULE & WALL TYPES A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A0.1. ITEM NO. 2. DRAWING A1.1 LOOR PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A1.1. ITEM NO. 3. DRAWING A1.2 LOOR PLAN, UPPER LEVEL A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A1.2. ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 CC-1-2

3 ITEM NO. 4. DRAWING A4.1 ROO PLAN A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A4.1. ITEM NO. 5. DRAWING A7.3 WALL SECTION DETAILS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A7.3. ITEM NO. 6. DRAWING A10.1 GENERAL DETAILS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A10.1 ITEM NO. 7. DRAWING M1.1 HVAC PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN LEVEL A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M1.1. ITEM NO. 8. DRAWING M1.2 HVAC PLAN, UPPER & ROO LEVELS A. Delete Drawing M1.2 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M1.2. ITEM NO. 9. DRAWING M5.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES A. Delete Drawing M5.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M5.1. ITEM NO. 10. DRAWING P0.1 PLUMBING PLAN, UNDERGROUND / BASEMENT LEVEL A. Delete Drawing P0.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P0.1. ITEM NO. 11. DRAWING P1.1 PLUMBING PLAN, MAIN & UPPER LEVELS A. Delete Drawing P1.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P1.1. ITEM NO. 12. DRAWING P2.1 PLUMBING LARGE SCALE PLANS A. Delete Drawing P2.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P2.1. ITEM NO. 13. DRAWING P4.1 PLUMBING WASTE AND VENT RISERS A. Delete Drawing P4.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P4.1. ITEM NO. 14. DRAWING E2.1 POWER PLANS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E2.1 ITEM NO. 15. DRAWING E3.1 SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E3.1 ITEM NO. 16. DRAWING E5.1 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE & GROUNDING DIAGRAM A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E5.1 ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 CC-1-3

4 ITEM NO. 17. DRAWING E7.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E7.2 ITEM NO. 18 DRAWING S1.1 OUNDATION AND LOWER LEVEL RAMING PLANS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S1.1. ITEM NO. 19 DRAWING S2.1 UPPER LEVEL AND ROO RAMING PLANS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S2.1. ITEM NO. 20 DRAWING S6.1 STRUCTURAL DETAILS A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S6.1. END O ADDENDUM ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 CC-1-4

5 SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REERENCES A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products abricated from Rolled, Pressed, and orged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved ormability (formerly ASTM A570). E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design, and Manufacture.. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal abrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 2. Division 21 Section on wet-pipe sprinkler system piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. 1.4 DEINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and ittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

6 C. Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. or selection and application, refer to MSS SP-69 except as modified within this specification. 1.5 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section paragraph on shop drawing submittals. B. Product Data: or each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermalhanger shield insert indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUACTURED UNITS A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: or piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

7 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 3. or Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. or Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 6. As an alternate to thermal-hanger shield inserts, provide Klo-Shure Insulation Couplings. This coupling is molded from a high strength, heat stabilized, flame retardant DuPont Hytrel thermoplastic polyester elastomer. Coupling is available for dropin hangers and strut-mounted hangers. Website for this insulation coupling is METAL RAMING SYSTEMS (STRUT SYSTEMS) A. MMA Manufacturer Metal raming Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Anvil-Strut; Anvil International. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. lex-strut Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation. g. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. h. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MMA Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: ormed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

8 6. Hanger Rods: Machine-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel and carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized. 2.3 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. This Article applies to plumbing systems only. B. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Mechanical-Anchor asteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Additional hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections. C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): or suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750). 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): or suspension of 120 to 450 deg (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN100 to DN400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

9 3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): or suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN15 to DN600), if little or no insulation is required. 4. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200). 5. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200). 6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200). 7. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN15 to DN50). 8. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN10 to DN200). 9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): or suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN10 to DN80). 10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): or support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750). 11. Clips (MSS Type 26): or support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): or support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Above used to support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor pipe sizes 4 inches to 36 inches. 13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): or support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. Above equivalent to Type 36, except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe. 14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): or stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN65 to DN900), when vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Above recommended for stanchion type support where vertical adjustment is required; 2-1/2 inches to 36 inches. 15. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): or suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN25 to DN750) in size, from two rods where longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): or suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20 (DN65 to DN500) in size, from a single rod where horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): or support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN50 to DN1050) in size, where longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and where vertical adjustment is not necessary. 18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): or support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN50 to DN600), where small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and where vertical adjustment is not necessary. 19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): or support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN50 to DN750), where vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to provision for expansion and contraction. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

10 D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Select size of vertical clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: a. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): or support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500). 2. our-bolt Riser Clamps: a. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): or support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500), when longer ends are required for riser clamps. E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): To provide adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): or higher temperature piping systems 120 to 450 deg (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): or use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): or attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): or higher temperature piping systems 120 to 450 deg (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.. Building Attachments: Attachment to metal pan deck is not allowed! Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types (do not attach to metal deck): 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): or upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete decking. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): or use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): or attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): or attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): or attaching to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): or attachment to structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): or attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): or attachment to bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): or attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

11 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): or attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): or attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: or support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light Duty (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium Duty (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (675 kg). c. Heavy Duty (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1350 kg). 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): or use on sides of steel beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): or attaching to steel beams where flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): or supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited. G. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Unless otherwise indicated, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: or supporting insulated pipe, constructed of 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield. Assembly shall be same thickness as adjoining insulation. H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Use where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): or light loads where vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): or equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

12 8. Constant Supports: Constant supports are used where piping stress is critical. Used where its necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, or on to critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. 1. ield assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. ield fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and this specification. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed, fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's instructions.. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe any anchors, and to facilitate action of any expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

13 I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. ill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: 1) Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 2) Klo-Shure Insulation Couplings. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: 1) Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 2) Klo-Shure Insulation Couplings. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and inch (1.91 mm) thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

14 3.3 SPACING O PIPE HANGERS A. Install hangers for horizontal pressurized piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Maximum Hanger Spacing Individual Perpendicular To Joist Parallel To Joist Nominal Hanger Rod Std. Wt. Copper Std. Wt. Copper Pipe Size Diameter Steel Tube Steel Tube Up to 1½" 3/8" 6 t. 5 t. 6 t. 5 t. 2", 2½, 3" 1/2" 8 t. 8 t. 8 t. 8 t. 4" 5/8" 8 t. 8 t. 8 t. 8 t. 1. Support vertical pipe at each floor. B. Install hangers for horizontal pipe with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Individual Pipe Material Hanger Rod Maximum Hanger Spacing and Size Diameter Perpendicular to Joist Parallel To Joist Cast Iron Up to 4", 10' Length 1/2" 8 t. 8 t. 5' Length 1/2" 5 t. 5 t. Cast Iron 6" 3/4" 4 t. 4 t. Cast Iron 8" 3/4" 3 t. Not Permitted Copper Tube Up to 1" 3/8" 8 t. 8 t. Copper Tube 1¼" to 2½" 3/8" 12 t. 12 t. Copper Tube 3" 1/2" 12 t. 12 t. 1. Support vertical copper tube every 10 feet. Support other vertical drainage pipe at each floor. 2. See structural details on sheet S6.1 for additional information. Space pipe support such that maximum load does not exceed 150 lbs. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

15 C. Trapeze hangers shall be installed using the same maximum hanger spacing defined in the paragraphs above. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, spacing of the hangers shall be governed by the minimum spacing for any of the individual pipes. The weight of the pipe and fluids shall in no case exceed 150 pounds per individual trapeze hanger rod. 3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. abricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 3.5 METAL ABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. it exposed connections together to form hairline joints. ield-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. ield Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. inish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.7 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

16 B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END O SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

17 SECTION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the followings systems: 1. Soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems specialties. 1.3 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kpa). 2. Sanitary Sewer, orce-main Piping: 50 psig (345 kpa). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section paragraph on shop drawing submittals. B. Product Data: or the following: 1. Cast iron soil pipe, fittings and couplings. 2. Solid wall PVC pipe, fittings and couplings. C. ield Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

18 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NS International. C. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be solid-wall PVC pipe and shall conform to ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. All pipe and fittings shall be listed by NS International. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cast Iron & PVC Soil Piping: a. AB & I. b. Charlotte Pipe and oundry. c. Tyler Pipe. C. lexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. D. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING A. Hubless Pipe and ittings: 1. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NS International. 2. Pipe and ittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

19 3. Couplings: Assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 and ASTM C 1277, with stainless steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve & bear the NS Trademark. 1) Manufacturers: a) ANACO. b) Mission Rubber Co. c) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2.3 COPPER TUBING A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage ittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. 2.4 SOLID-WALL PVC PIPE AND ITTINGS A. Comply with NS 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NS-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NS-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent. C. PVC Socket ittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM 656. E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D SPECIALTY PIPE ITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. itting-type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

20 2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Standard: ASTM C b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for additional excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/4 through NPS 10 (DN 32 through DN 250): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Standard-duty, shielded. 2. NPS 1-1/4 through NPS 8 (DN 32 through DN 200): Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 3. PVC pipe: PVC piping is not allowed above ground! C. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 through NPS 15 (DN 50 through DN 375): Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. D. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 thru NPS 6 (DN 40 to DN 150) shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 33 Section "acility Sanitary Sewer" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

21 B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and ittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and ittings." E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1/4 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping 3 inch and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping sizes 4 inches and larger. 2. Vent Piping: 1/16 inch per foot down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction and until smoke test(s) have been accomplished and witnessed by the Commissioning Agent. J. The PVC drain, waste, and vent piping systems shall be protected from chemical agents, firestopping materials, thread sealant, plasticized-vinyl product of other aggressive chemical agents not compatible with PVC compounds. K. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and ittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and ittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes. E. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. Provide transition piping support as detailed in the drawings. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing ixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing ixtures." 2. Plumbing ixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

23 3.7 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. inal Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kpa). rom 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. inished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Waste and vent piping system smoke testing: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the Owners Representative.. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

24 2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kpa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END O SECTION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

25 SECTION DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water softeners and accessories for water-supply systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing and HVAC Insulation" for softener-tank insulation. 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing and HVAC Insulation" for softener-piping insulation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; ion-exchange resins; salt purity and form; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment layouts and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Reports: or softener tanks, as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. Manufacturer's ield Service Reports: As specified in this Section. E. ield Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.. Maintenance Agreement: As specified in this Section. G. Maintenance Data: or water softeners to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

26 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water softeners and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Qualified manufacturers will have the entire softener certified as a system to NS/ANSI 61, NS/ANSI 372, CSA 483.1, UL/CUL and CE. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Include coverage for the following: 1. Attrition loss of resin not to exceed 3 percent per year. 2. Resin not to be washed out of system during service run or backwashing period. 3. Effluent turbidity not to be greater and color not to be darker than incoming water. 4. Underdrain system, gravel, and resin not to become fouled, with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or scale from softener equipment or soft water, while operating according to manufacturer's written operating instructions. C. Warranty Period: Not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance: Submit four copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued Service and Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Owner's acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing continued testing and servicing to include replacing materials and equipment. Include one-year term of agreement with option for one-year renewal. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

27 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. urnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Salt for Brine Tanks: urnish in the same form as and at least three times original load a. Pellet orm: In 40- or 50-lb (18.1- or 22.7-kg) packages. 2. Store salt on raised platform where directed by Owner. Do not store in contact with concrete floor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Commercial/Industrial Water Softeners: a. Bruner Corp. b. Columbia Water Conditioning Systems, Inc. c. Culligan International Co. d. EcoWater Systems, Inc. e. Marlo of Racine, Inc. f. United States ilter Corp. g. Water & Power Technologies, Inc. h. Water King, Inc. i. Water Soft, Inc. 2.2 COMMERCIAL WATER SOTENERS A. Provide as indicated a vertical pressure type water softener system complete with pressure vessel, softening resin, control valve, brine maker and electronic controller. The system will be of an approved design as fabricated by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of water treatment equipment. All equipment and material will be supplied in compliance with the specifications as intended for a complete and operational system. B. The system specifications are based on Culligan International Model CTM-60-P 14-inch Duplex Tank with Progressive low and 2-inch Plumbing Adapter configured as a Duplex system with Aqua Sensor device. 1. The purpose of the Culligan International Culligan Top Mount Duplex automatic water softener will be to remove mineral hardness from a known water supply to a level not to exceed 17.1 mg/l, as determined by an accepted ASTM or EDTA test method, when the system is operated at 10 GPM and in accordance with the operating instructions. The system will be capable of supplying 4,561 gallons of softened water between DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

28 regenerations based on the influent water analysis listed later in this equipment specification. 2. The systems performance is rated at a design flow rate of 10 GPM with a rated pressure drop of 0.1 PSI, and will be capable of a peak flow rate of 138 GPM for sustained periods of 90 minutes with a pressure drop of 25 PSI. C. Performance and Design Data: 1. Influent Water Analysis: a. Calcium, Ca: 70.8 b. Magnesium, Mg: 16.9 c. Total Hardness, gpg: 13 d. Eff. Hardness, 100% Cap.: 13 (Constituents above are expressed in mg/l as CaCO3 or as otherwise specified.) e. Iron, e: <0.05 f. Manganese, Mn: <0.02 g. Total Dissolved Solids, TDS: (Constituents above are expressed in mg/l.) h. Turbidity, NTU: 0.1 i. Color: 2.0 j. ph: 8.0 D. Design Parameters: 1. Normal System low and Pressure Drop: 51 GPM at 15.0 PSI 2. Maximum System low and Pressure Drop: 69 GPM at 25.0 PSI 3. Backwash/Rinse low: 3.5 GPM 4. Backwash Volume: 116 gallons nominal 5. Daily Water Usage: 4,000 gallons 6. Daily Hours of Water Demand: 8 7. Operating Temperature Range: Operating Pressure Range (System): PSI 9. Electrical Requirements: 120 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Ph (dedicated receptacle req'd,) 10. System Dimension (L x W x H): 69 inches x 20 inches x 66 inches. E. Effluent water quality: < 1 grains per gallon hardness (ASTM soap test method). Softener Tank(s): Each system shall include two (2) tank(s). Each softener tank shall be 14- inches in diameter. The overall tank height (less base) shall be 27-inches, sufficient to allow for a proper freeboard space above the resin bed for adequate expansion of the resin during backwashing. 1. Tank(s) shall be manufactured of polyester reinforced by a continuous roving glass filament overwrap. The top opening will be 4"-8 UN threaded and the tank bottom will be supported on a molded structural base. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

29 G. Internal Distribution: 1. The upper distribution system shall be of the single point diffuser type to dispense water laterally to avoid channeling within the resin bed. 2. The lower distribution system shall be of the single point distributor type, constructed of PVC pipe and a fine slotted strainer to provide even flow distribution through the resin bed. The distribution system shall be embedded in a two-layer subfill of washed inorganic material to support the resin bed. H. Main Operating Valve: 1. The main operating valve shall be of a top mount design constructed of thermoplastic resistant to attack by substances found in natural water supplies. Inlet and outlet connections to be 1.5 or 2-inch NPTE. The Cv (flow coefficient) of the main operating valve shall be equal to or greater than A vacuum breaker and pressure regulating valve shall be integrated in the design of the main operating valve. 3. The main operating valve will be of the motor driven, mechanically activated design with 5 positions to accomplish the regeneration steps of backwash, brine draw/rinse, fast rinse and brine refill in addition to the service position. The internal seals will be of a modular design for ease of replacement and service. 4. The main operating valve will be fitted with a fixed orifice eductor to control brine draw/slow rinse. 5. The main operating valve shall be designed by the same manufacturer as the water softener system and tested prior to shipment. I. low Control 1. The backwash flow controller shall be a pressure-compensating orifice capable of providing and maintaining proper backwash flows over the entire listed operating pressure range of the system. The backwash flow controller shall be easily serviced without special tools and design so that service to the flow controller can be performed without disassembly of the valve body or the sequencing controller and without disconnecting existing inlet and outlet piping connections. J. Controls: 1. A fully integrated programmable microprocessor driven electronic controller shall be provided to automatically cycle the main operating valve through the regeneration sequence. The electronic controller shall be designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer as the water treatment equipment. 2. The controller shall be capable of initiating a regeneration by accepting an internal signal from the controller time keeping device; an external Hall-Effect flow sensor, an aqua sensor, an external device such as a remote start push-button or any combination of these methods. The controller shall sequence all steps of an automatic regeneration and automatically return the softener to a service or stand-by mode. The initiating time and/or volume setpoints shall automatically reset upon completion of the regeneration sequence. 3. The controller shall include a sealed keypad, capable of programming all controller functions, located on the face of the controller. The controller display shall be a multi-line DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

30 OLED display capable of full text readouts of operating status and codes. The firmware shall be capable of being updated to the latest version. 4. An audible alarm beeper capable of emitting a tone of ~70 dba shall be provided but capable of being disabled if so desired. 5. The controller shall allow for a manual initiation of the automatic regeneration sequence by utilizing a regeneration selection from the controller menu. 6. The controller shall operate on a low voltage electrical system. The system shall include a UL/CUL listed transformer. The entire electronic control package and its associated inputs/outputs shall require not more than 24 50VA. The control shall be rated for wet environments and certified to NEMA 3R. 7. The controller shall utilize EEPROM to save pertinent programmed data and statistical functions. The controller must retain all functionality for power interruptions of less than 72 hours. A battery backup shall be provided and it shall be capable of maintaining the time of day for a minimum of 5 years. 8. System Control Options: a. Timeclock - An operator selected program of a time-initiated reconditioning for single units shall be provided. The controller shall be capable of being entirely programmed in the field without additional interface devices. The operator shall be able to select reconditioning to occur after a specified number of hours or days or specific day of the week. The electronic controller shall indicate various data that includes number of reconditionings in the last 14 days, days since last reconditioning, total number of reconditionings for the life of the unit, current day of the week, time of day, and unit in reconditioning. b. Water Meter - An operator selected volume based reconditioning for single units shall be provided. A flow sensor package shall be provided consisting with an appropriately sized installation fitting. The operator shall be able to select reconditioning to occur after a specified number of gallons. The electronic controller shall indicate various data that includes number of reconditionings in the last 14 days, days since last reconditioning, total number of reconditionings for the life of the unit, time of day, and unit in reconditioning. c. Culligan Aqua Sensor: An operator selected program of immediate or delayed hardness initiated regeneration for single units shall be provided. An Aqua- Sensor control probe will be inserted into the resin bed and will sense the need for regeneration based on electrical impedance within the resin bed and will signal the circuit board to initiate regeneration after a continuous 6-minute increase in impedance ratio. The system will compensate for variations in water hardness and temperature and will require no field adjustments when operated within the normal temperature range of the softener. The controller shall be capable of being programmed in the field without additional interface devices. The controller shall indicate various data that includes number of regenerations in the last 14 days, days since the last regeneration, total number of regenerations for the life of the unit, last slow rinse time, time of day, and unit in regeneration. d. In addition, the following functions shall be provided as part of the system controller: 1) The controller shall have the capability of providing communications with the following external devices: a) Serial Communications (RS-232 & RS-485). DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

31 b) USB. c) Modbus RTU. d) Profibus Communications. e) BACnet Communications. f) Modem (cell modem or land-line modem). g) Dry Contact Alarm Relay. h) Wireless Remote (local R wireless remote, 200-foot range). 2) Regeneration Sequence Timers: The controller shall allow control customization of individual regeneration cycle times, each programmable from 1-99 minutes. The regeneration cycle and time of cycle remaining shall be displayed when in regeneration. 3) Lockout function: The controller shall include a lockout to prevent unauthorized personnel from altering program data. 4) Regeneration override: The controller shall include a function to direct pre-programmed regeneration after a user determined period of time (hours or 24-hour intervals) without an input signal from another regeneration initiation device. 5) Alarm Status Indicator: The controller shall monitor operation of internal functions. If a fault is identified, the need for operator intervention will be signaled visually within the controller display. 6) Two Auxiliary Outputs: Two auxiliary outputs shall be integral to the controller circuit board. Each Output shall be capable of being programmed to provide power to a "Normally Open" or "Normally Closed" contact (user choice). These 24VAC outputs shall be used only for the purpose of energizing a relay coil. 7) low Rate Indication: The controller shall be capable of indicating the flow rate of the treated water. 8) Totalizer: The controller shall include a totalizer function and a display capacity to 99,999,999 units before resetting to zero. The totalizer value shall be displayed through the controller display during operation. e. low Sensor(s): 1) Each softener will include a turbine-type Hall Effect flow sensor. 2) The sensor shall be integral to the control valve. A cable shall be provided for direct connection to the system controller. 3) The flow sensor package provided shall be functional within the flow range of 1.5 to gpm. 4) The flow sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 2% over the full range. f. Aqua-Sensor Probe: 1) A patented Aqua-Sensor control probe will be inserted into the resin bed and will sense the need for regeneration based on an electrical imbalance within the resin bed and will signal the circuit board to initiate regeneration after a continuous 6-minute imbalance. The system will compensate for variations in water hardness and temperature and will require no field adjustments when operated within the normal temperature range of the softener. The controller shall be capable of being programmed in the field DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

32 K. Exchange Resin: without additional interface devices. The Aqua-Sensor will also be capable of determining when the brine solution is rinsed from the resin bed during the Brine Draw /Slow Rinse cycle, triggering the control to move to ast Rinse cycle. 1. The ion exchange resin shall be virgin high capacity "standard mesh" of sulfonated polystyrene type stable over the entire ph range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or osmotic shock. Each cubic foot of resin will be capable of removing grains of hardness as calcium carbonate when regenerated with 15.0 lbs of salt. The resin shall be solid, of the proper particle size of 16x40 mesh, U.S. standard screen and will contain no agglomerates, shells, plates or other shapes that might interfere with the normal function of the water softener. The resin shall be manufactured to comply with the food additive regulation 21 CR as set forth by the USDA. 2. The system shall include 2.0 cubic feet of exchange resin per vessel and a total of 4.0 cubic feet of resin for the system. L. Brine System: 1. Provide a complete brine system consisting of a plastic tank, cover, salt platform, brine well, an automatic brine valve and all necessary fittings for operation with the water softening system. The system shall consist of a combined brine measuring and salt storage tank with salt platform. The tank will be sized 18.0 in. x 38.0 in.; the system will include a total of one (1) brine tank(s). The brine tank can hold 600 lbs of salt which provides for 33 regenerations per salt fill. 2. The brine tank will be equipped with a float operated non-corrosive field serviceable brine float valve for automatic control of brine withdrawal and fresh water refill. 3. The brine valve will automatically open to admit brine to the resin tank during eduction and close automatically providing positive shut-off to prevent air from entering the system. The brine valve will also regulate the flow of soft water into the brine tank during refill. The brine valve works with the timed fill feature of the main operating valve controls to admit the correct volume of fresh water to the brine tank in accordance with the refill time setting in the control program. The brine valve will include a float operated safety shut-off valve as a back up to the timed refill from the main operating valve control to prevent brine tank overflow. M. Accessories: 1. CTM-60-P Softener with No Hard Water Bypass. 2. Brine System with 24-inch x 40 inch tank, 1/2-inch valve and 650 pound salt capacity. 3. Aqua-Sensor Kit (Outdoor Rated). 4. Culligan GBE Standard Communication Cable. 5. CTM Plumbing Adapter, 2" NPT, Inlet/Outlet. N. Instructions: One (1) complete set of installation, operating and maintenance manuals shall be provided. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

33 O. ield Service: The services of a factory authorized service representative shall be provided to supervise, inspect and provide operator training as required for initial start-up and system operation. Contact your local Culligan dealer for service rates and scheduling. P. Warranty: A single written warranty must be provided from the manufacturer of the water softener system covering workmanship and materials. 2.3 WATER TESTING SETS A. Water-Hardness Testing Set: Manufacturer's standard testing apparatus and chemicals with testing procedure instructions and metal container suitable for wall mounting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE BASES A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for equipment. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 23 Section "Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.2 WATER SOTENER INSTALLATION A. Install water softener equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible. B. Anchor tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate. C. Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each water softener tank. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages or Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. D. Install water testing sets near each water softener and mount on wall where indicated. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Make piping connections to dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings. D. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

34 E. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. Electrical power wiring, devices, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. G. Provide vacuum breaker for protecting fiberglass tank from vacuum. H. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's ield Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field assembly of components and installation of water softeners, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. Leak Tests: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics. Comply with the following: 1. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water." 2. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water." 3. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water." 4. ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water." 5. ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits." 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Perform the following final checks before startup: 1. Water Piping Systems: Verify that tests have been completed. 2. Load Softener Tank: Install gravel to cover lower distribution system and add water; smooth gravel surface and add softening resin. 3. Load Brine Tank: Add water and fill tank with pellet-form salt. DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

35 C. Energize circuits. D. Adjust operating controls. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. END O SECTION DOMESTIC WATER SOTENERS

36 SECTION CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the following systems: 1. Chemical-waste and vent, gravity-flow, nonpressure piping system designated "acid or chemical waste." 1.3 DEINITIONS A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. B. PP: Polypropylene plastic. C. PVD: Polyvinylidene fluoride plastic. 1.4 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-low, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot (3-m) head of water. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: or chemical-waste piping materials, components, and specialties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: Piping from different manufacturers may be used in same system if indicated and suitable transition fittings matching both piping materials are used. B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory. C. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping." CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

37 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Enfield Industrial Corp. 2. Georg ischer 3. Orion ittings, Inc. 4. Schier Products Co. 5. Town & County Plastics, Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND ITTINGS A. PP Drainage Pipe and ittings: ASTM 1412, pipe extruded and drainage-pattern fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with fire-retardant additive complying with ASTM D 4101 and certified to meet ASTM E-84 and UL 723. Include fusion- and mechanical-joint ends. 1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive may be used for underground installation. B. PVD Drainage Pipe and ittings: ASTM 1673 pipe extruded and fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PVD resin complying with ASTM D 3222 and certified to meet ASTM E-84 and UL 723. Include drainage-pattern fittings complying with ASTM D 3311, except with fusion- and mechanical-joint ends. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining materials. B. Couplings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining system piping. CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

38 C. Adapters and Transition ittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings, adapters, gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for joining different piping materials. D. langes: Assemblies of companion flanges gasket complying with ASME B16.21 and compatible with system liquid, and bolts and nuts. 2.5 SPECIALTIES A. Pipe Connections Side connections for inlet, outlet, and vent pipes. Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), as required to match connected piping. 1. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. 2. PVD: ASTM D 3222, PVD resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Above loor Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion or mechanical joints. 2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PVD drainage piping and electrofusion or mechanical joints. C. Under Slabs-on-Grade, Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion joints. 2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PVD drainage piping and electrofusion joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. B. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and maintenance. CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

39 C. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. D. langes may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. If specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Plastic-Piping Electrofusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to ASTM C. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system materials. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 eet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 eet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 eet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 eet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 33 inches (840 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

40 2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. G. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 72 inches (1830 mm). H. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVD piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2 (DN 20 to DN 40): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. I. Install supports for vertical PVD piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) every 48 inches (1220 mm) and NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger every 72 inches (1830 mm). J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect chemical-waste piping to sinks, specialties, accessories, and equipment. Use chemicalresistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials being joined. 3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.8 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Chemical-Waste Piping Inspection: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealing after system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment. CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

41 b. inal Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Chemical-Waste Piping Testing: Test systems according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, according to the following: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Test piping at completion of piping roughing-in. Tightly close all openings in piping system, and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot (3-m) head of water. rom 15 minutes before test starts through completion of test, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. inished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures and equipment have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves building, and introduce air into system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of fixture to measure pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use procedures described below: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water. END O SECTION CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

42 SECTION HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEINITIONS A. Temperature Control Contractor: This term shall be synonymous with installing Temperature Controls Contractor. B. BAS: Building Automation System. This term is used synonymously with acilities Management Control System (MCS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS). C. DDC: Direct Digital Controls. D. EMCS: Energy Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building Automation System (BAS) and acilities Management Control System (MCS). E. MCS: acilities Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building Automation System (BAS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS).. LAN: Local area network. G. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing. H. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. 1.3 SCOPE O WORK A. The temperature control system shall be a Building Automation System that is connected to the Owner s network. B. The Temperature Control Contractor will furnish to Owner a Building Automation System which will include the main DDC panel(s), unitary DDC controllers, and required sensors and relays to accomplish the sequence of operation. 1. The Temperature Control Contractor will install the automation system in strict accordance with the installation manuals and provide dampers, damper and valve and actuators, and system wiring. C. Communication wiring shall be tested to demonstrate functional operation. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

43 D. All controls wiring shall be in conduit, refer to Raceway And Boxes for Electrical System for requirements. E. Wiring diagrams, temperature control drawings and point list shall be furnished by the BAS Supplier to the successful Temperature Control Contractor for their use in installing the system.. The Temperature Control Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers indicated on the drawings. Installation of these components will be by the Mechanical Contractor. 1. All reducers and fittings necessary to install smaller than pipe size valves shall be furnished and installed under applicable piping sections. 2. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor 3. Review the damper schedule with BAS supplier prior to ordering parts. G. The system shall be a DDC controls system. 1. urnish and install a complete building automation system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in the specifications. 2. Building shall have all direct digital controls with electric actuators for dampers. 3. Unit controllers may communicate with main control panel via wireless communication technology. 4. At a minimum, provide controls for the following: a. Roof top units. b. Variable volume terminal units. c. Exhaust and supply fans. d. Cabinet unit heater controls. e. Radiant finned tube heaters. f. Power wiring to DDC devices, smoke control dampers and BAS panels except as otherwise specified. H. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all necessary Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors. I. All software required will be turned over to the Owner ready for use including all operation parameters, set points, and schedules. J. The Drawings and Specifications are not intended to show all details. Secure satisfactory information before submitting the proposal and include in the proposal a sum sufficient to cover all items of labor and material required for the complete installation of the devices and system described. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

44 K. All Work performed under this Section of the Specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, this specification will govern. L. urnish and install all actuators including necessary linkages, wire, and power wiring. M. Provide all necessary power and control wiring not shown to be provided on the Electrical plans. N. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system see System Acceptance and Testing section of this document. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. O. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of the system in coordination with the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner s representative. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. In accordance to the scope of work, the system shall also provide a graphical, web-based, operator interface that allows for instant access to any system through a standard browser. The contractor must provide microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions. or this project, the system shall consist of the following components: 1. Ethernet-based Network Router and/or Network Server Controller(s): The BAS Contractor shall furnish Ethernet-based Network Server Controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet at a minimum of 100mbps, and provide communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and/or other Input/Output Modules. Network Server Controllers shall conform to BACnet device profile B-BC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial communications or ARCNET to communicate with the workstations will not be accepted. 2. Network Controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Network Server Controllers (B-BC). 3. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs): Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to control its associated equipment. Each BACnet protocol SDCU shall conform to the BACnet device profile B- AAC. BACnet SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC). B. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 100 or 1000 Mpbs Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Modbus, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Server Controllers (NSCs), user workstations and a local host computer system. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

45 C. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at 100 or 1000 Mbps. D. The system shall enable an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk protocol and/or ANSI / ASHRAE Standard , BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. Native support for the LonTalk protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAE Standard , BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs. E. The system shall enable an architecture that utilizes a MS/TP selectable KBaud protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI / ASHRAE Standard , BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. The AAC shall be capable of communicating as a MS/TP device or as a BACnet IP device communicating at 10/100 Mbps on a TCP/IP trunk. The ANSI / ASHRAE Standard , BACnet protocol is required to assure that the project is fully supported by the leading HVAC open protocol to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.. The software tools required for network management of the LonTalk protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAE Standard , BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans and are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. Minimum BACnet compliance is Level 4; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet IP or MS/TP. Physical connection of LonWorks devices shall be via Ethernet IP or TT-10A. G. The system shall support Modbus TCP and RTU protocols natively, and not require the use of gateways. H. The field bus shall support the use of wireless communications. I. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric actuation of valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and actuators as specified herein. The BMS is intended to seamlessly connect devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable frequency drives, low voltage lighting systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily coexist on the same network channel. 1. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java and HTML5 enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. 2. Data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. 3. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer s internal Intranet network. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

46 J. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the approved manufacturer's local field office. The approved manufacturer's local field office shall have a minimum of 3 years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in the bid and submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer when requested. Supervision, hardware and software engineering, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the approved manufacturer's local field office and shall not be subcontracted. The control contractor shall have an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the site with factory certified technicians and engineers, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment for the installed system, and the control contractor shall have 24 hours/day, 7 days/week emergency service available. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Visio Professional on AutoCAD software or equivalent. In addition to the drawings, the Temperature Controls Contractor shall furnish a flash drive containing the identical information. 2. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and work stations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller. "Typicals" will be allowed where appropriate. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, software description, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. 2. Each product marked with label used in Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Coordinate with controlled equipment wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 4. Written description of sequence of operation with equipment identified with same label as indicated in the Plans. 5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics. 7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data conductors. 8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

47 9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. D. ield Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Test each and every software and hardware point in the system in order to assure proper operation and functionality. System acceptance will not take place until the completion of such testing. Include a "checked by", "date of testing", on test report. E. Maintenance Data: or systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.. Project Record Documents: 1. Record Control drawings shall be provided. The Control s Contractor shall verify that installation drawings are coordinated with the Record drawings, and update them if required. 2. Control drawings for each system shall show all devices affecting the control circuit and how each device interconnects to other devices in the circuit including, but not restricted to, devices provided or connected by others such as fire alarm relays or motor starter interlocks. 3. All devices in the control circuit shall be identified by their function in the circuit and labeled with the brand name and part number of the device. Drawings shall also show voltage characteristics for electrical and electronic devices. 4. Drawings shall have wiring details showing all electrical connections at devices and control panel terminals including color codes and terminal connection numbers at devices and control panels. All electric wiring shall be identified separately on drawings to distinguish wire by voltage characteristic and function. 5. The intent of this specification is to obtain from the Temperature Control Installer one drawing for each system which contains all of the information needed to identify all components in the control circuit and to trouble shoot any problem which could arise in the operation of the control system. 6. After submittal of record drawings and before acceptance of the job, a representative of the Temperature Control Contractor shall conduct an on-site walk through of the control system with the Owner s Representatives. At the time of the walk-through, the Temperature Control Contractor shall point out the location of all of the components of each control system and describe the operation of each system to the Owner s Representatives. 7. The record drawings shall show actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

48 G. Acceptance Statement: Signed by Owner stating that training has been completed and operation and maintenance information has been received. 1.6 OWNERSHIP A. The Owner shall retain licenses to software for this project. B. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer s standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition off this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to the Owner as defined by the manufacturer s license agreement, but shall protect the manufacturer s rights to disclosure of Trade Secrets contained within such software. C. The licensing agreement shall not preclude the use of the software by individuals under contract to the Owner for commissioning, servicing or altering the system in the future. Use of the software by individuals under contract to the Owner shall be restricted to use on the Owner s computers and only for the purpose of commissioning, servicing, or altering the installed system. D. All project developed software, files and documentation shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: 1. Server and workstation software 2. Application programming tools 3. Configuration tools 4. Network diagnostic tools 5. Addressing tools 6. Application files 7. Configuration files 8. Graphic files 9. Report files 10. Graphic symbol libraries 11. All documentation 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment and software proposed by the supplier shall be currently in manufacture. No custom products shall be allowed unless required by the specification. All products shall be supported by the manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years, including spare parts, board repairs and software revisions. 1. Provide a price schedule with guaranteed maximum pricing for each product and component for a period of 3 years. Price shall include both material and labor. B. System Startup and Commissioning 1. Control system to be set up and checked out by factory trained and competent technicians skilled in the setting and adjustment of EMS equipment used in this project. This technician shall be experienced in the type of systems associated with this EMS. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

49 2. At time of final observation, demonstrate the sequence of operation for each system to the Project Manager. 3. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified elsewhere. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the Owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications. 4. The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems in the presence of the equipment manufacturer s representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect s representatives. 5. The BAS Contractor shall provide a technician for three (3) days manpower and engineering services required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract. 6. Startup Testing shall be performed for each task on the startup test checklist, which shall be initialed by the technician and dated upon test was completion along with any recorded data such as voltages, offsets or tuning parameters. Any deviations from the submitted installation plan shall also be recorded. 7. Required elements of the startup testing include: a. Measurement of voltage sources, primary and secondary b. Verification of proper controller power wiring. c. Verification of component inventory when compared to the submittals. d. Verification of labeling on components and wiring. e. Verification of connection integrity and quality (loose strands and tight connections). f. Verification of bus topology, grounding of shields and installation of termination devices. g. Verification of point checkout. h. Each I/O device is landed per the submittals and functions per the sequence of control. i. Analog sensors are properly scaled and a value is reported j. Binary sensors have the correct normal position and the state is correctly reported. k. Analog outputs have the correct normal position and move full stroke when so commanded. l. Binary outputs have the correct normal state and respond appropriately to energize/de-energize commands. m. Documentation of analog sensor calibration (measured value, reported value and calculated offset). n. Documentation of Loop tuning (sample rate, gain and integral time constant). 8. A performance verification test shall also be completed for the operator interaction with the system. Test elements shall be written to require the verification of all operator interaction tasks including, but not limited to the following. a. Graphics navigation. b. Trend data collection and presentation. c. Alarm handling, acknowledgement and routing. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

50 d. Time schedule editing. e. Application parameter adjustment. f. Manual control. g. Report execution. h. Automatic backups. i. Web Client access. 9. A Startup Testing Report and a Performance Verification Testing Report shall be provided upon test completion. 1.8 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS A. All products of the EMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. With the submittal documents, verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products, shall be provided. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals, are not acceptable. 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems. 2. UL-873; Temperature Indication and Regulating Equipment. 3. CSA; Canadian Standards Association. 4. CC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices. 5. Comply with UL 94-5V for items in air plenums. 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 7. Comply with NPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems." 8. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components. 9. Transient Protection: Comply with the standard for Transient Surge withstand capabilities for electrical devices ANSI C62.41, IEEE , Categories A and B. B. All products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. System installation shall comply with NPA, NEMA, local and national codes. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. actory-mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation (if applicable). C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

51 1.11 WARRANTY AND WARRANTY SERVICE A. At completion of final test of installation and acceptance by the District, provide any service incidental to proper performance for a period of one year. Provide one year in warranty service with minimum of 2 maintenance/calibration inspections. B. Equipment shall be warranted for one year (including defects in workmanship and material). During warranty period supplier shall replace or repair, free of charge, any equipment proven to be defective in workmanship or material. C. Provide all software upgrade service and material for one year. D. Certain electronic devices not manufactured by the EMS supplier, such as computers, printers and CRT's display, shall carry the original manufacturer's warranty. Pass any registration and warranty documents and warranty rights to the District. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Trane. 2. Allerton. 3. Schneider Electric. 4. Johnson Controls. 5. Siemens. 6. Daikin. 7. Honeywell. B. Control Systems Components. Damper, valves and similar end device components can be from the following manufacturers: 1. Barber Colman. 2. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 3. Delta. 4. Detroit Controls. 5. Dodge Engineering & Controls. 6. Dwyer. 7. Dynacon Inc. 8. Erie Controls. 9. unctional Devices Inc. 10. Hawkeye. 11. Heat-Timer Corp. 12. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control. 13. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 14. Kele & Associates. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

52 15. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company. 16. Landis & Staefa, Inc. 17. Mamac Systems. 18. Penn. 19. Pre Con Corporation. 20. Ruskin. 21. TSI Inc. Environmental Measurements & Controls Div. 22. Uni-Line North America; Robertshaw Div. 2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. General 1. To that end, this project shall be comprised of a high speed Ethernet network utilizing BACnet/IP communications between System Controllers and Workstations. Communications between System Controllers and sub-networks of Custom Application Controllers and/or Application Specific Controllers shall utilize BACnet/MSTP (RS485) or BACnet/Zigbee or a combination of the network protocols. a. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/Zigbee ( ) as defined by the Zigbee Standard. 1) Each communication interface shall be Zigbee Building Automation Certified product as defined by the BACnet Standard and the Zigbee Alliance. 2) Each System Controller shall function as a BACnet Router to each unit controller providing a unique BACnet Device ID for all controllers within the system. 2. The Controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters and network switches routers necessary for the high speed Ethernet communications network. 3. All values within the system (i.e. schedules, datalogs, points, software variables, custom program variables) shall be readable and controllable (where appropriate) by any System Controller or BACnet Workstation on the communications network via BACnet. B. SYSTEM CONTROLLERS 1. There shall be one or more independent, standalone microprocessor based System Controllers to manage the global strategies described in Application and Control Software section. a. The System Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. b. The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC c. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. d. All System Controllers shall have a real time clock. e. Data shall be shared between networked System Controllers. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

53 f. The System Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: 1) Assume a predetermined failure mode. 2) Generate an alarm notification. 3) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the failure. 4) Automatically reset the System Controller to return to a normal operating mode. g. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at -40 to 122. h. Clock Synchronization. 1) All System Controllers shall be able to synchronize with a NTP server for automatic time synchronization. 2) All System Controllers shall be able to accept a BACnet time synchronization command for automatic time synchronization. 3) All System Controllers shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable. i. Serviceability 1) Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. 2) The System Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the controller. 3) All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal connectors. 4) The System controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for installation and replacement. j. Memory. The System Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information indefinitely without power to the System controller k. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. l. BACnet Test Labs (BTL) Listing. Each System Controller shall be listed as a Building Controller (B-BC) by the BACnet Test Labs with a minimum BACnet Protocol Revision of APPLICATION SPECIIC DEVICES A. Application specific devices shall have fixed function configurable applications. B. If the application can be altered by the vendor s application programmable tool, the device is an advanced application controller and not an application specific device. C. Application specific devices shall be BTL certified. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

54 2.4 AIR TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER A. Direct Digital Controls: 1. General: DDC Controls, actuator and costs to mount, calibrate and test the system shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor. 2. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted by terminal unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Shall be capable of maintaining airflow to within +/- 5 percent of rated unit airflow setpoint with 1.5 duct diameters straight duct upstream from the unit. B. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminal Unit Control: 1. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controller per VAV terminal unit. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer and transformer shall be supplied by the BAS contractor. The cost to mount, calibrate and test the controller, transducer, transformer and actuator shall be in the BAS price. 2. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies and provide the points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specified monitoring and diagnostics. Points to include occupied and unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. a. Grouping: The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands. These groups shall make it possible for the operator to send a common command to all boxes in a group to operate in the same mode. BAS shall also compile on a group basis, the following: 1) Minimum group temperature. 2) Maximum group temperature. 3) Average group temperature. 4) Current airflow through boxes in group (total). 5) Ventilation ratio. b. Setpoint Control: The BAS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of each VAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual zone setpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and not be dependent upon the BAS for control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to control to current setpoints. c. Cooling Valve Control: The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open, fully closed, maximum CM, or minimum CM position based on operator commands. The operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum and minimum airflow limits of the air valve through the BAS. d. Operating Mode: The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupied mode based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating & cooling setpoints shall be enterable for each mode through the BAS. Other modes available for special applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimum flow. e. Control Offset: The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating setpoints of one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This capability will allow for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system requirements, such as demand limiting. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

55 f. Automatic Recalibration: The system shall automatically recalibrate its air flow sensing and air valve position measurement system at system startup and on a scheduled basis. g. Terminal Unit Status Reports: or each terminal unit, the BAS shall provide an operating status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CM, etc.), setpoints, and modes. h. Terminal Unit Group Report: or each group of VAV terminal units, the BAS shall report the group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature, minimum zone temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also display for each terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints and the current zone temperature. 3. Terminal Box Diagnostics: a. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control at its maximum CM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its low range, unit shall control to its minimum CM setpoint. b. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. A diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry. c. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressure dependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry. d. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shall automatically control to programmed occupied setpoints. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry. 2.5 CONTROLLER SOTWARE A. System Software 1. urnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator interface. a. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: 1) Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. 2) Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

56 3) Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. 4) Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit. b. Trend Log Application 1) Trend log data shall be sampled and stored on the System Controller panel and shall capable of being archived to a BACnet Workstation for longer term storage. a) Trend logs shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. b) Trend log intervals shall be configurable as frequently as 1 minute and as infrequently as 1 year. 2) Automated Trend Logs. a) The system controller shall automatically create trend logs for defined key measurements for each controlled HVAC device and HVAC application. b) The automatic trend logs shall monitor these parameters for a minimum of 7 days at 15 minute intervals. The automatic trend logs shall be user adjustable. B. Local Occupant Interface Touch sensitive display 1. A wall mounted touch screen display shall be located in Office for local access to the system. 2. A local occupant interface shall provide a single point from which to control setpoints from multiple pieces of equipment. 3. The local interface shall provide scheduling with the ability to schedule events as least 1- year in advance. 4. The local occupant interface shall optionally include PIN control and limited temperature adjustments. 5. The local interface shall display alerts that require service of the connected equipment. 6. Local occupant interface touch sensitive display hardware requirements: a. Input power: 9-12 VDC b. Temperature: 0 C to 40 C c. Humidity: 85% RH d. Mounting Type: VESA (75 mm x 75 mm) HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

57 7. Local Occupant Interface Touch Screen Display must meet the following Agency Compliance: a. ROHS b. CC CR Title 47, Part 15. c. CE Compliant. d. Multiple Mounting Options (Ability to be mounted on a VESA mount (75 mm x 75 mm), or remotely mounted). C. Mobile App Interface: 1. The operator interface shall support system access on a mobile device via a mobile app to: a. Monitor equipment b. Make setpoint changes c. Override occupancy d. View dashboard graphics. e. Control Space temperature. f. Manage alarms. 2.6 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK AND SPACE SENSORS A. Architecture/Communication 1. Wireless equipment controllers and auxiliary control devices shall conform to: B. Operator Interface a. IEEE radios to minimize risk of interference and maximize battery life, reliability, and range. b. Communication between equipment controllers shall conform to ZigBee Building Automation (ZBA) standard as BACnet tunneling devices to ensure future integration of other ZBA certified devices. c. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft. (762 m) with less than 2% packet error rate to ensure reliable operation. d. To maintain robust communication, mesh networking and two-way communications shall be used to optimize the wireless network health. e. Wireless communication shall be capable of many-to-one sensors per controller to support averaging, monitoring, and multiple zone applications. f. Certifications shall include CC CR47 - RADIO REQUENCY DEVICES - Section & Subpart E. 1. Wireless Space Sensors a. Battery life shall be 15 years or greater to minimize the need for battery replacement in typical operating conditions. b. To check for proper operation, wireless space temperature sensors shall include a signal strength on the space sensor display. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

58 c. To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be displayed on the digital display. Error codes shall include: not associated, address to 000, improper software configuration, input voltage too high, or general sensor failure. Codes shall be indicated on inside of sensor back cover. d. An optional 2% relative humidity sensors module shall be available for humidity control applications to minimize the need for wires sensors, and shall not shorten typical battery life to less than 15 years. 2. Service Tools a. To support network setup and troubleshooting, service tools shall display link quality and hop quantities for each wireless device. b. Wireless service tool access to comm link shall be provided to minimize installation and troubleshooting labor. C. Auxiliary Control Devices 1. Wireless space sensors for use in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems. a. Temperature and Humidity Range 1) The ambient operating temperature range for the wireless space sensor shall be 32 to 122 (0 to 50 C). 2) The ambient storage temperature range for the wireless space sensor shall be -40 to 185 (-40 to 85 C). 3) The ambient operating and storage humidity range for the wireless space sensor shall be 5 to 95%, non-condensing. b. Components 1) Wireless space sensors shall be available as: temperature only, field configurable model with optional 2% humidity module for use in either model above. The field configurable model shall all allow field configuration without a field service tool. Configuration options include: setpoint, override pushbuttons, fan speed, and system mode switches. System mode, fan speed and setpoint shall include a lock option. 2) The wireless space sensor addresses shall be held in non-volatile memory to ensure operation through system voltage disturbances and to minimize the risk of incorrect association. 3) The wireless space sensor shall be addressed using pushbuttons and display with numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time and minimize risk of incorrect addressing. Two position DIP switches are not acceptable. 4) Installation and replacement of failed sensors shall be accomplished automatically after power up. 5) The wireless space sensor shall include security screws to protect against theft. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

59 6) Wireless space sensor component certifications shall include: c. Accuracy a) TP Canada Compliance b) UL Energy Management Equipment c) UL 94 - The Standard for lammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances: 5 VA flammability rating d) UL Temperature regulating and indicating equipment 1) To ensure proper system performance, the wireless space sensors shall automatically determine when the space temperature is rapidly changing. When the space temperature is readily changing, the space temperature shall be transmitted at least once each 30 seconds. The maximum time between transmissions shall be 15 minutes. Space temperature sensing accuracy shall be +/- 0.5 (+/- 0.28C). d. Power Requirements 1) The wireless space sensor battery life shall provide at least 15 years life under normal operating conditions and must be readily available size AA, 1.5V. 2. CO2 Sensors can be combined temperature and CO2 sensors a. CO2 Range: 0 to 10,000 ppm CO2 b. Accuracy at 25 C: +/- 40 ppm CO2 + 3% if reading (includes repeatability) c. Pressure Dependence of Output: built-in pressure sensor eliminated inaccuracy due to altitude. d. Recommended calibration Interval: None units are auto-calibrated. e. Response Resolution: 50 ppm change or 15 minute heartbeat. f. Life expectancy: 15 years. g. Operating Temperature: rom 32 to 122 (0 C to 50 C) h. Storage Temperature: rom -40 to 158 (-40 C to 70 C) i. Humidity Range: 20% to 60% RH j. Warm-Up Time: 1 full spec 15 minutes k. Housing Material: Polycarbonate/ABS Blend (wall) 3. Wireless Communications Interface for use in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems a. Temperature and Humidity Range 1) The ambient storage temperature range for the wireless communications interface shall be -40 to 185 (-40 to 85 C).C. 2) The ambient operating and storage humidity range for the wireless communications interface shall be 5 to 95%, non-condensing. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

60 b. Components D. WCI Wireless Communication 1) The wireless communications interface shall be addressed using rotary switches with numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time and minimize risk of incorrect addressing. Two position DIP switches are not acceptable. 2) Wireless Comm Interface certifications shall include: a) TP Canada Compliance b) UL Energy Management Equipment c) UL 94 - The Standard for lammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances: 5 VA flammability rating d) UL Temperature regulating and indicating equipment e) ZigBee Building Automation, BACnet Tunneling Device. 1. Signal range typically has a radius of 200 T (60 M) - potentially more for line-of-sight installations, and less for obstructed installations. 2. Each network shall have 1 WCI network coordinator and up to 30 WCI network members. 3. The Tracer SC supports up to 8 network coordinators and up to 120 WCI network members. 4. Maximum IMC wiring length between a WCI and a controller is 656 ft (200 m). 2.7 ENCLOSURES A. All controllers and field interface panels shall be mounted in new enclosures unless otherwise stated in this specification. B. or all input/output devices which require field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a field interface panel (IP). All other field interface devices will be mounted at the point of field interface in a separate enclosure suitable for the location. Provide an enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts. C. IP's shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, safety circuits, and I/P transducers. D. The IP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. Each side of the cabinet shall have knockouts for rigid, soft or flexible tubing. To join individual cabinets, remove knockouts and fasten appropriate fittings and locknuts. E. The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within controllers shall be wrapped and secured.. All tubing shall be connected to enclosures through conduit. Use bulkhead fittings where appropriate. G. The panels shall be Detroit Controls Inc., DCP Series Panels or equal. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

61 2.8 IELD DEVICES A. Included with field devices are all sensors, transmitters, transducers, wells, relays, switches and power supplies necessary for the operation of the Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. B. All field devices shall include the associated wiring, conduit, mounting, and enclosures. C. Also included are control valves, valve actuators, damper actuators, and conventional controls necessary for a completely functioning system in accordance with the sequence of operation. D. Provide all field devices per the performance requirements set forth in this section. All devices selected by the Temperature Controls Contractor must be contained in the Submittal documents and are subject to approval by the Engineer. E. All controls wiring shall be in conduit, refer to Raceway And Boxes for Electrical System for requirements.. All sensors and signal conditioning equipment will be of the type which are universally accepted in the industry, can easily be second sourced and is compatible with all of the manufacturer's equipment. 2.9 COMMUNICATIONS WIRING A. General Communication Guide: Do not run communication link wiring in the same conduit or wire bundle with ac-power wires (including conductors running from Triac-Type outputs). Keep polarity consistent throughout the site. Make sure that the 24 VAC power supplies are consistent in how they are grounded. Avoid sharing 24 VAC between controllers. Use only one type of communication cable; do not mix cable. If an existing job used alternate cable, continue using the same cable after approval from the project manager. B. BACnet MS/TP communication cable must be shielded twisted pair, 18 AWG minimum, stranded, tinned copper conductors. Shield must be continuous throughout, isolated from other conductors or ground, and grounded at the system controller only. Maximum capacitance between conductors is 24 Picofarads per foot. Maximum distance is 4000 T (1372 M). Maximum of 60. Expansion module link limit is 656 T (200 m). A BACnet terminator is required at each end of the communication link. Topology must be daisy chained. C. Ethernet LAN communication cable maximum distance is 295 ft (90 m) plus 33 ft (10 m) for patch cables INPUT DEVICES A. The system shall maintain the specified analog end-to-end accuracy throughout the warranty period from sensor to controller readout. B. Transducers may be supplied as an integral unit with the field sensor, or mounted separately in a field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All transducers will be calibrated. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

62 C. Sensors (transducers) will be appropriately packaged for the location. 1. Architectural housing for space mounting. 2. Weatherproof/sunshield housing for outdoors. 3. Thermal well housing for water applications. 4. Protective housing for duct mounting. D. The sensor/transducer shall be selected to withstand ambient conditions where: 1. Moisture or condensation is a factor. 2. Vibration exists from ductwork, equipment, etc. 3. Reasonably expected transient conditions exist for temperatures, pressures, humidities, etc. outside the normal sensing range. E. The sensor/transducer will be appropriately selected to most closely match the expected sensing range.. System accuracy of sensed conditions shall be as follows: for space temperature in the range for duct temperatures in the 40 to 130 range for outside air temperatures in the -30 to 140 range for water temperatures in the 30 to 230 range (thermowell) inch for static pressure over 0-5 inch water gauge inch for filter status differential over a 0-2 inch range % for pressure switches % for air flow. G. Sensors in the return or discharge duct shall be of the single point type. Sensors in the mixed air will be of the average type. H. Thermowells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 o and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. I. All digital inputs will be provided by dry contacts. The contacts will be wired normally open or normally closed as required. J. Temperature Sensors: Provide thermistor or thin film silicon sensors for all temperature applications. Solid state sensors shall be linear, drift free, and require only a one time calibration. Temperature sensors will be by the use of thermistors (Precon model ST-3 or equivalent) or RTD's. K. Motor status (pumps, fans, etc.) by current sensing switch. Adjustable current sensing switches shall be used on all motors. L. an status by adjustable current sensing switches. M. Differential pressure transducers shall withstand a momentary pressure of 150% of their maximum rating without damage. Acceptable suppliers include Modus, Robinson Halpern and Rosemont. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

63 2.11 OUTPUT DEVICES A. The use of multiplexers will not be accepted. B. ield relays shall have a minimum life of 1 million cycles without failure. C. All digital outputs will be electrically isolated from the digital controller by interface relays DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Electronic Actuators: Damper actuators shall be of the direct coupled type, suitable for direct mounting to the damper shaft or valve stem. Actuators shall provide modulating rotational control or two-position as required by the sequence of operation. B. Damper actuators shall be spring-return type on outside air intake and relief air locations. C. Damper actuators shall be sized to provide ample power to overcome the friction of damper linkage, seals, and air pressure acting on the damper louvers. The operators shall be fully proportioning unless otherwise specified. The operators shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and variable load requirements. D. Damper actuator mounting shall be outside of the air stream. The actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The linkage arrangement shall permit normally open or normally closed positions as indicated. E. When fail-safe positioning is required (outside air intakes and relief air outlets), the actuators shall have spring return.. Damper actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper throughout its operating range DAMPERS A. Dampers furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor shall be low leak parallel or opposed blade and shall be single or multiple blade as required. Motorized dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed blade for proportional control applications or as shown on the plans. Dampers are to be installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor under supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor. Parallel blade dampers shall be used for fresh air/return air mixing applications. B. All dampers frames are to be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized hat channel and shall have flanges for duct mounting. C. Bearings shall be stainless steel pressed into the damper frame. D. Axles shall be 1/2-inch diameter minimum, plated steel. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

64 E. Replaceable rubber seals shall be provided with the damper. Seals shall be mechanically attached to each blade edge. Independent self-compensating stainless steel end seals shall be installed between the blade ends and the damper frame to provide a tight closing, low leakage damper.. Leakage through the damper shall not exceed 2 CM per square foot at 1-inch w.g. for all sizes 24 inches wide or above. Blades shall be airfoil shape, single piece 14 gauge minimum and 6-inch wide nominal width. Leakage and flow characteristics charts must be submitted to the Engineer prior to approval of dampers. G. Where vertical blade applications are shown or required, thrust collars and special construction and/or bracing for the dampers may be necessary. Consult the manufacturer for recommendations. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. H. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model CD60 or equal WIRING AND CONDUIT A. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit. B. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code. C. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2-inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit seal-off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential. Refer to Raceway And Boxes for Electrical System for requirements. D. lexible metallic conduit (maximum 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. E. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy S boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.. Conduit support / Anchor Methods 1. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors. 2. Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or present inserts. 3. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts, or welded studs. 4. Wood Surfaces: Wood screws. 5. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors or power driver studs. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

65 2.15 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS A. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings. B. Space temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams. C. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized. D. ield interface panel enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is being interfaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that control units are connected to a conditioned power supply. B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring are installed before proceeding with installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment level and plumb. B. Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. D. Verify location of exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate 42 inches above the floor. E. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." I. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23. J. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

66 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION PRACTICES A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. B. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc. C. Conduit, in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors. D. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. E. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas. All control tubing or wiring in concrete walls or floors shall run in rigid conduit.. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the EMCS system. G. Control system power shall be obtained from dedicated circuits on the nearest available 120 V panel and clearly labeled. H. All power wiring for the EMCS equipment shall be done with a dedicated earth ground by means of wire media only, originating at the power service source earth ground. I. The 120 VAC power wiring to each Level 1 controller shall be a dedicate run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device. 3.4 DEVICE MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES A. The VAV terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a flowcross or equal static pressure and total pressure sensing device, suitable for termination to barb fittings on the VAV controllers flow sensor. The VAV controller and damper actuator shall be provided and mounted by the Temperature Controls Contractor. B. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor. C. Dampers will be furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor (unless noted otherwise) and installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. D. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

67 E. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assemble multiple section automatic dampers, furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor, with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper actuators.. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. G. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification while providing air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification has been eliminated. H. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary valved pressure taps, water, drain and overflow connections and piping. I. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary piping connections required for flow devices, valve position indicators, etc. J. Automatic control valves and separable wells will be furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. K. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke. L. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage. M. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed. N. or duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork. O. or building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building. 3.5 SOTWARE INSTALLATION A. Provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system. B. Provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list. 3.6 CLEANUP A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

68 contract. Clean the exposed surfaces of tubing, hangers, and other exposed metal of grease, plaster, or other foreign materials. 3.7 IDENTIICATION A. Identify all control wires within control cabinets with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings. 3.8 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1. Start, test, and adjust control systems. 2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control sequences. 3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation specified. 3.9 TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of 3 hours of on-site instructions, to owner personnel, in the operation and maintenance of the control system. Provide training after the system has been installed and checked out. The Owner will select and assign personnel to be trained. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. 2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and requesting logs. 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect-Engineer, with at least seven days' advance notice ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Point Verification: 1. To verify end-to-end operation of the system, the Contractor shall provide a hard copy of an "All Points Summary Listing" to the Owner of each part or system to be placed in warranty by the Owner and Engineer. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

69 B. Sequence Verification: 1. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative and the Engineer of systems which perform all specified sequences. The Contractor shall verify all sequences of operation and place the system into warranty acceptance test. C. Verify DDC as follows: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operation verified. a. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. b. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value. c. Time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. d. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. e. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points ON-SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within two years of date of Substantial Completion, provide a Spring and all site visit, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions SYSTEM VERIICATION A. General: The system installation shall be complete and startup service performed. Certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Complete system startup services prior to substantial completion. The system will not be accepted until the field test procedures have been demonstrated, and all errors corrected WARRANTY ACCESS A. The Owner shall grant to the Contractor, reasonable access to the EMCS system during the warranty period. B. The Contractor shall provide and implement a system for purposes of remote diagnostics and notification of desired exceptions. System shall provide the following functions: 1. Access to the entire facility control system by the Contractor to provide service and diagnostic support. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

70 2. Access by the Owner from off-site for similar purposes and for remote operation, monitoring, and adjustment of facility functions. END O SECTION HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

71 SECTION SEQUENCE O OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and devices and submittal requirements. 1.3 DEINITIONS A. BAS: Building Automation System. This term is used synonymously with acilities Management Control System (MCS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS). B. DDC: Direct-Digital Controls. C. EMCS: Energy Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building Automation System (BAS) and acilities Management Control System (MCS). D. MCS: acilities Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building Automation System (BAS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS). E. CM: Cubic feet per minute.. VD: Variable frequency drive. G. Contractor: Where not specifically described herein, this term is used synonymously with Temperature Control Contractor (TCC). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section paragraph on shop drawing submittals. B. Submittals for Sequence of Operation shall be included with Division 23 Section HVAC Instrumentation and Controls. SEQUENCE O OPERATION

72 PART 2 - SEQUENCE O OPERATION 2.1 GENERAL A. Operator Workstation: Display the following plus those as specified in this section: 1. Normal and holiday schedules. 2. Alarm and time of alarm occurrence. 3. Alarm history. 4. System graphics. B. Occupied/Unoccupied Modes: or the purposes of this specification, these modes are defined as the Owner-defined and -adjustable hours of normal building operation. These schedules shall be adjustable from an Operator Workstation, user interface, or the web-based interface. Note that the Occupied/Unoccupied Mode shall apply to the overall building as a whole. Individual room occupancy sensors (for lighting control) are a different type of setting, and do not control the status of HVAC equipment described herein. These sensors are specified in Division 26 Section Lighting Control Devices. C. General EMCS System Sensors: 1. Outdoor Temperature: Provides outdoor temperature reading. 2.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Domestic Hot Water (110 deg ) Circulating Pump (P-1): 1. The operation of this circulation pump shall be controlled by an aquastat. 2. The circulating pump shall run continuously under normal operation. 3. The aquastat shall serve as high-temperature protection for the loop. When the loop temperature exceeds 115 deg (adj.) as sensed by the aquastat, the circulating pump shall be turned off. When the loop temperature drops below the high-limit deadband, the circulating pump shall energize and run continuously. 2.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Thermostats (integral and remote mounted) shall control the electric unit heater to maintain the space thermostat setting, by default 65 deg (adj.). B. The EMCS shall monitor space temperature. C. The EMCS shall disable unit heaters based on outdoor air temperature above 65 (adj.). SEQUENCE O OPERATION

73 2.4 EXHAUST AN CONTROL A. The following fans shall be started and stopped by the BAS system based on adjustable time of day schedule or sensor as described: 1. Exhaust fans E-1. a. This fan is a direct drive fan with a motorized damper. b. This fan shall be started and stopped based on adjustable occupied/unoccupied schedule. The exhaust fan s operation shall be enabled by a damper end-switch. When the exhaust fan's motorized damper has been proven open, the exhaust fan shall be started. When the fans are off, the dampers shall be closed. c. Operator Station Display. Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal: 1) System Graphic. 2) an start/stop. 3) an on/off status via current switch. 4) Damper open/close. 5) Damper End switch open/close. 2.5 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOTOP UNITS WITH DX COOLING/HEATING AND MODULATING GAS HEAT A. Building Automation System Interface: The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied Bypass, Morning Warm-up / Pre-Cool, Occupied / Unoccupied and Heat / Cool modes. If a BAS is not present, or communication is lost with the BAS the controller shall operate using default modes and setpoints. B. Modes of Operation 1. Occupied Mode: During occupied periods, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements. The unit controller shall control the supply fan speed to maintain the current duct static pressure setpoint (adj.). The DX cooling/heating shall stage and gas heat shall modulate to maintain the current discharge air temperature setpoint. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the current discharge air temperature setpoint. 2. Unoccupied Mode: When the lowest space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 65.0 deg. (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the DX heating shall stage and/or gas heat shall enabled. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the DX heating and/or gas heat shall be disabled. When the highest space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 80.0 deg. (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the DX cooling shall be enabled. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint SEQUENCE O OPERATION

74 minus the unoccupied differential of the supply fan shall stop, the DX cooling shall be disabled and the outside air damper shall close. 3. Optimal Start: The BAS shall monitor the scheduled occupied time, occupied space setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal start occurs. 4. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the average space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode. 5. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the average space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode. 6. Optimal Stop: The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop mode is active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space temperature offset setpoint. 7. The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop mode is active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space temperature offset setpoint. 8. Economizer: The supply air sensor shall measure the dry bulb temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil while economizing. When economizing is enabled and the unit is operating in the cooling mode, the economizer damper shall be modulated between its minimum position and 100% to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The economizer damper shall modulate toward minimum position in the event the discharge air temperature falls below the discharge low limit temperature setpoint. Compressors shall be delayed from operating until the economizer has opened to 100%. a. Reference Enthalpy: Outside air enthalpy shall compare with the reference enthalpy control setpoint. The economizer shall enable when outdoor air enthalpy is less than enthalpy control setpoint BTU/LB. The economizer shall disable when outdoor air enthalpy is greater than enthalpy control setpoint BTU/LB. C. Demand Control Ventilation: With input from the BAS individual space CO2 sensors the unit controller will look at the CO2 sensor value and compare it to the CO2 Setpoint. If the CO2 level in the space is higher than the setpoint, the unit controller will modulate the outdoor air damper open (PID loop in the controller is configurable) until the CO2 levels in the space are within the setpoint value. The unit controller will then modulate close the OA damper (or minimum position based on the value in the PID loop) and wait for the space CO2 level to change again. D. Power Exhaust: Powered Exhaust: When the supply fan operation has been proven and the unit is in occupied there will be a call for the exhaust. When there is a call for the exhaust the isolation dampers will be powered and the powered exhaust will be enabled once the end switch on the exhaust actuators are proven. The exhaust fan speed will modulate to maintain CM offset from input from outside air airflow measuring station (Demand Control Ventilation- DCV). During Unoccupied the powered exhaust will be shut off. SEQUENCE O OPERATION

75 E. Outdoor Airflow Monitoring: The outdoor airflow monitoring station and modulating damper option selected with the unit, the unit controller will look at the Outdoor Airflow sensor value and compare it to the Outdoor Airflow Setpoint. If the outdoor airflow is lower than the setpoint, the unit controller will modulate the outdoor air damper open (PID loop in the controller is configurable) until the airflow levels reach the setpoint value or until the damper is at the Maximum Damper Position. The controller will continue to monitor the airflow and adjust damper position to match the outdoor airflow to the setpoint.. Energy Recovery Wheel Operation: The ERV is interlocked with indoor fan and exhaust fan operation in occupied heating, or cooling modes. When operating in Economizer Mode or Ventilation Mode the ERV is disabled and the ERV by-pass dampers will open, powered exhaust remains on. During Unoccupied both the ERV and the powered exhaust will be shut off. During ERV operation, if the Exhaust Temperature across the ERV drops below 25, the outdoor air bypass damper will start to slowly modulate open. If after the bypass dampers modulate to 100 percent open and the exhaust temp across the ERV drops below 15 (2 Deadband) for 5 minutes, the unit controller will command the ERV off. Note: or units with optional ERV defrost heater, the control sequence will engage heater at frost condition rather than stop ERV. G. Condenser Head Pressure Control: A temperature sensor on the header of the condenser coil will measure the saturated liquid temperature. Variable frequency drives will adjust the speed of two condenser fans as needed to maintain head pressure control. H. Supply an: The supply fan shall be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during the unoccupied mode. A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the fan. If the switch does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation a fan failure alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS, the unit shall stop, requiring a manual reset. I. Supply Duct Static Pressure Control: The unit controller shall modulate the supply fan output as required to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint. If the duct static pressure falls below the supply air static setpoint + dead band, the unit controller shall increase the output to the supply fan to maintain setpoint. If the duct static pressure rises above the supply air static setpoint + dead band, the unit controller shall decrease the output to the supply fan to maintain setpoint. If for any reason the supply air pressure exceeds the fixed supply air pressure limit of 2.5 (adj.) inches of W.C. the supply fan shall shut down. The unit shall be allowed to restart three times. If the over pressurization condition occurs on the fourth restart, the unit shall shut down and a manual reset diagnostic is displayed at the remote panel and/or the BAS system. J. ilter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes for 2 minutes after a request for fan operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. K. Safety Control Operation: 1. Smoke Detectors: Provide contacts for alarm interface to fire-alarm control panel. 2. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence. SEQUENCE O OPERATION

76 L. The following points shall be displayed on the graphic for this system: 1. Supply Air Temperature. 2. DX Coil Leaving Temperature. a. Outdoor Air Temperature b. Outdoor Relative Humidity. c. Exhaust Air Temperature. d. Supply an Speed. e. Exhaust an Speed. f. Outdoor Damper Position. g. Return Air Damper Position. h. Digital Scroll Compressor Percentage. i. Supply Air Temperature set point from BAS. j. System Start Command k. Supply an Status l. Air ilter Pressure Drop m. Air ilter Pressure Drop high limit alarm n. Exhaust an Status o. Compressor 1 Status p. Compressor 2 Status q. Gas Heat Enable and modulation percentage. r. Alarm Reset s. System Alarm Status t. Supply Air Static Pressure set point from BAS. u. Supply Air Static Pressure from BAS. v. Energy Recovery Wheel Status w. CO2 level setpoint. 2.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied and Unoccupied commands. The BAS may also send a Heat/Cool mode, priority shutdown commands, space temperature and/or space temperature setpoint. If communication is lost with the BAS, the VAV controller shall operate using its local setpoints. The EMCS shall monitor all control points and alarms provided by the manufacturer and display a representative system graphic on the operator s workstation. B. Modes of Operation: 1. The occupancy mode shall be communicated or hardwired to the controller via a binary input. 2. Occupied Mode: When the unit is in the occupied mode the VAV shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable ventilation and airflow setpoints shall be enforced. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the VAV. 3. Unoccupied Mode: When the unit is in unoccupied mode the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint SEQUENCE O OPERATION

77 regardless of the presence of a hardwired or communicated setpoint. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the VAV shall modulate fully closed. 4. Heat/Cool Mode: The Heat/Cool mode shall be set by a communicated value or automatically by the VAV. In standalone or auto mode the VAV shall compare the primary air temperature with the configured auto changeover setpoint to determine if the air is "hot" or "cold". Heating mode it implies the primary air temperature is hot. Cooling mode it implies the primary air temperature is cold. 5. Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local setpoint, the VAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The VAV shall use the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the VAV shall use the communicated value. 6. Cooling Mode: When the unit is in cooling mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active cooling minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum cooling airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Default Value Occupied Cooling Setpoint Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint Occupied Min Cooling Airflow Setpoint Occupied Max Cooling Airflow Setpoint 72.0 deg deg deg. See VAV Schedule See VAV Schedule The VAV shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity. 7. Heating Mode: When the unit is in heating mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active heating minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Heating Setpoint Unoccupied Heating Setpoint Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint Default Value 71.0 deg deg deg. See VAV Schedule See VAV Schedule The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. SEQUENCE O OPERATION

78 8. Reheat Control: Reheat will only be allowed when the primary air temperature is 5.0 deg. below the configured reheat enable setpoint of 70.0 deg. (adj.). The reheat shall be enabled when the space temperature drops below the active heating setpoint and the minimum airflow requirements are met. During reheat the VAV shall operate as follows: a. Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR): If the space temperature is at the heating setpoint, the electric heater shall modulate as required to maintain space temperature at the active heating setpoint while the VAV operates at its minimum heating airflow setpoint. If the discharge air temperature reaches the design heating discharge air temperature setpoint (adj.), the VAV shall modulate airflow between the minimum heating airflow setpoint and the maximum heating airflow setpoint as required to maintain space temperature at the active heating setpoint, while the electric heater modulates to maintain discharge air temperature at the design heating discharge air temperature setpoint. If the airflow reaches the maximum heating airflow setpoint, the VAV shall modulate the electric heater as required to maintain space temperature at the active heating setpoint, while the VAV operates at its maximum heating airflow setpoint. 9. Space Sensor ailure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. Space sensor failure shall cause the VAV to drive the damper to minimum air flow if the VAV is in the occupied mode, or drive it closed if the VAV is in the unoccupied mode. 10. Space CO2 concentration (where shown). The zone shall monitor the space CO2 level and adjust the RTUs outdoor air quantity to maintain the maximum CO Operator Workstation. Display the following a. System Graphic. b. Space/Room/area served. c. Space occupied/unoccupied. d. Space temperature. e. Space temperature set point, occupied. f. Space temperature set point, occupied standby. g. Space temperature set point, unoccupied. h. Space CO2. (See Plans for locations). i. CO2 set point (RTU System setting). j. Air-damper position as percent open, 0 to 100 percent. k. Electric heating element as percent total, 0 to 100 percent. l. Air flow. m. Minimum Air low set point. n. Heating Air low set point. o. Cooling maximum airflow set point. p. Discharge air temperature. SEQUENCE O OPERATION

79 2.7 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT AND ELECTRIC RADIANT INNED TUBE HEATING (ATU-102 & TR-101& TR-102) & (ATU-201 & TR-201 & TR-202) A. The controls sequence shall follow the same operation as the outlined above in the VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT with the following modifications in the sequence and system graphics. B. Modes of Operation: 1. Heating Mode: When the unit is in heating mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active heating minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Heating Setpoint Unoccupied Heating Setpoint Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint Default Value 71.0 deg deg deg. See VAV Schedule See VAV Schedule The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. The radiant finned tube heater shall be activated before the heating minimum air flow is increased. The reheat and radiant heaters shall work in unison to maintain space setpoint. 2. All other modes of operation shall remain the same as outlined above. The finned tube electric radiant (TR-##) heaters shall be disabled. 3. Operator Workstation. Display the following along with graphic information noted under VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT : a. System Graphic. b. Space/Room/area served. c. Space occupied/unoccupied. d. Space temperature. e. Space temperature set point, occupied. f. Space temperature set point, occupied standby. g. Space temperature set point, unoccupied. h. Electric heating element as percent total, 0 to 100 percent. i. Electric radiation units space temperature 2.8 SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS (SSIU/SSOU-*) A. This system shall be controlled by the specified control system in Division 23 Section "Split- System Air-Conditioning Units." SEQUENCE O OPERATION

80 B. Elevator Machine Room-211: Sensor shall monitor space temperature. An alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS if the space temperature falls above 80 (adjustable) and below 60 (adjustable). END O SECTION SEQUENCE O OPERATION

81 SECTION METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Double-wall round & flat oval ducts and fittings. 4. Sheet metal materials. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Duct Liner. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: or each type of the following products: 1. Sealants and gaskets. 2. Duct Liner and adhesives. B. Shop Drawings: 1. actory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 2. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. METAL DUCTS

82 3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment. C. Leakage Test Report. D. ield quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA , Section "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND ITTINGS A. General abrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum duct gages shall be per SMACNA with the following additional constraint: a. No duct shall be constructed of sheet steel less than 26 gage [ inch] thickness. No exceptions! B. Transverse Joints and ormed-on Transverse Joints (langes): Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." 1. Rectangular Duct Construction 2-Inch Positive or Negative Pressure Class a. abricate ductwork per the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and lexible and as further outlined below: 1) or ductwork sizes 34-inches and under, button punch snap lock (SMACNA igure L-2) will be allowed for longitudinal seams. 2) or ductwork sizes 36-inches and larger, longitudinal seams shall be Ductmate, Ward, T.D.C., T.D.. with Pittsburgh lock (SMACNA igure L- 1) longitudinal seams. 3) All duct joints will be sealed in accordance with this specification. METAL DUCTS

83 2. Rectangular Duct Construction 3-Inch Positive or Negative Pressure Class a. abricate ductwork per the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and lexible and as further outlined below: 1) or ductwork sizes 28-inches and under, button punch snap lock (SMACNA igure L-2) will be allowed for longitudinal seams. 2) or ductwork sizes 30-inches and larger, longitudinal seams shall be Ductmate, Ward, T.D.C., T.D.. with Pittsburgh lock (SMACNA igure L- 1) longitudinal seams. 3) All duct joints will be sealed in accordance with this specification. 3. Transverse Joints: Ductmate 25 or 35. a. actory fabricated slide-on transverse joints may be used at Contractor's option with proper submittal data. Proper submittal data shall include MSD Sheets, Specification Sheets, Applicable Duct Construction Standards, and Supporting Test Data. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Ductmate Industries Inc. b) Ward Duct Connectors Inc. c) Ward Industries Inc. b. Ductmate, Ward Duct Connectors Inc., and Ward Industries Incorporated duct connection systems will be accepted. Duct constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturer's guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. c. Contractor-fabricated or factory-fabricated transverse flange joints which are formed directly onto the end of the duct wall may be used at contractor's option as described in this paragraph. ormed-on flanges (T.D.C./T.D../T-25A/T-25B/T- 24) will be accepted. ormed-on flanges will be constructed as a SMACNA T-24 flange, whose limits are defined on page 1-25, 1985 SMACNA Manual, irst Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed-on flanges will be accepted. ormed-on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42 inches wide or less and subjected to 2-inch w.g. or less. d. All applied connectors at transverse joints shall be sealed using a butyl rubber gasket that is supplied by the manufacturer and installed in the field by the Contractor. e. All seams shall be sealed with a UL-Classified 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed sealant or better in accordance with SMACNA duct sealing requirements. f. Ductwork support, access doors not part of ducts, bar or angle reinforcing damper rods and items made of uncoated mild steel shall be painted with two coats of primer or provide galvanized equivalent. C. Longitudinal Seams: Button punch snap lock (SMACNA igure L-2) or Pittsburgh lock as outlined previously in the specifications; no other exceptions. METAL DUCTS

84 D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Chapter 2, "ittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." 2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND ITTINGS A. General abrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and lexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill Airlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. WESCO. g. Norlock. h. Wichita Sheet Metal. B. Transverse Joints: abricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." 1. Transverse Joints shall have slip connections except where flanged connections (Ductmate or other flanged connections) are called for in this specification. C. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and igure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." D. All round ducts shall generally be spiral seam with slip connections. 1. Exception: Snap lock ductwork is generally prohibited. However, Snap lock ductwork may be used as the last duct section connection to a diffuser above a concealed ceiling. Any Snap lock ductwork used must be 26 gauge or heavier. METAL DUCTS

85 2.3 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND & LAT OVAL DUCTS AND ITTINGS A. Double Wall (Insulated) Ducts: abricate double wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions. 1. Minimum duct gages shall be per SMACNA with the following additional constraint: a. No duct shall be constructed of sheet steel less than 26 gage [ inch] thickness. No exceptions! 2. Thermal Conductivity (k Value): 0.26 at 75 deg (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature. 3. Outer Shell: Base outer shell metal thickness on actual outer shell dimensions. abricate outer shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation, and in metal thickness specified for single wall duct. 4. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) thick fibrous glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single wall duct or uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter. 5. Perforated Inner Liner: abricate round and flat oval inner liners with sheet metal having 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction: a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: inch (0.5 mm) with standard spiral seam construction. b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: inch (0.5 mm) with single rib spiral seam construction. c. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: inch (0.55 mm) with single rib spiral seam construction. 6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means. B. Double-Wall (Insulated) ittings: abricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions. 1. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): 0.26 at 75 deg (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature. 2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. abricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the same metal thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings. 3. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal single-wall size. 4. Perforated Inner Liner: abricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following sheet metal thicknesses: a. Ducts 3 to 34 Inches (75 to 865 mm) in Diameter: inch (0.7 mm). b. Ducts 35 to 58 Inches (890 to 1475 mm) in Diameter: inch (0.85 mm). c. Ducts 60 to 88 Inches (1525 to 2235 mm) in Diameter: inch (1.0 mm). METAL DUCTS

86 5. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means. 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/l (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. langed Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. METAL DUCTS

87 5. Use: O. 6. or indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. lange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. H. Wire Hanger Specification 1. At the contractor s option, Gripple Hang-ast Wire Duct Hanger Systems Numbers 2, 3, and 4 may be used for duct support. Per SMACNA testing, the Gripple Hang-ast Wire Duct Hanger Systems Numbers 2, 3, and 4 are acceptable alternatives for use with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and lexible, Second Edition, The Contractor shall provide the necessary supports / sway bracing to prevent ductwork from movement when using the Gripple Hang-ast Wire Duct Hanger Systems. 3. or externally insulated rectangular ductwork systems use the Gripple Wire Duct Hanger Systems, with cradle and corner saddles to provide uniform support and to prevent puncturing the vapor barrier. METAL DUCTS

88 4. The basis of this Wire Hanger specification is Gripple Inc. Alternate manufacturers who comply with this specification will be considered. The use of "Gripple" language within this specification is not intended to limit the manufacturers. 5. Wire (Gripple) hangers may be used to suspend ductwork only. 6. Wire (Gripple) hangers consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with either a ferruled loop, permanently fixed threaded 1/4-inch (or 3/8-inch) stud, or permanently fixed nipple end with toggle, at one end or hook or eyelet. 7. Only wire and or supports and parts supplied by the wire manufacturer shall be used with the system. All end fixings must be supplied by the same manufacturer as the wire rope. There shall be no mix and match parts and or wire of varying manufacturers. The system is secured and tensioned with a Gripple hanger self-locking grip at the other end. 8. Quality Assurance / Standards a. Wire (Gripple) hangers have been independently tested by UL, CSA and SMACNA, approved by ULC and CSA and comply with the requirements of DW/144 and BSRIA - Wire Rope Suspension Systems. Wire rope used shall be manufactured to BS EN 12385: Product Selection a. The contractor shall select the correct specification of wire (Gripple) hanger to use for supporting each particular service from Table 1 below: b. Table 1 Wire (Gripple) Hanger Safe Working Loads Wire Rope Size Working Load limit (lbs) No lbs No lbs No lbs No lbs No lbs c. Each rope size is designated with a maximum Safe Working Load limit (which incorporates a 5:1 safety factor). d. Where the installed wire rope is not vertical then the working load limit shall be reduced in accordance with the recommendations given in the manufacturer s handbook. e. No in-line joints shall be made in the wire rope. 2.7 DUCT LINER A. ibrous-glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NPA 90A, or NPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "ibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. METAL DUCTS

89 c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, lexible: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg (R-value 6.3 (hr ft2 )/Btu at 75 deg (24 deg C) mean temperature. 3. Solvent or Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NPA 90A or NPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. or indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbonsteel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from inch- (0.41-mm) thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 7-11, "lexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. old and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally. 7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. abricate edge facings at the following locations: a. an discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated. METAL DUCTS

90 8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. abricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." METAL DUCTS

91 3.2 INSTALLATION O EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to the schedule as follows. B. Definitions: 1. Conditioned Space: A space that is cooled, heated or indirectly cooled or heated. 2. Indirectly Conditioned Space: An enclosed space within a building that is not a heated space or a cooled space, which is heated or cooled indirectly by being connected to adjacent space(s) (example ceiling plenum). 3. Unconditioned Space: An enclosed space within a building that is not a conditioned space or a semiheated space. Crawlspaces, attics, and parking garages with natural or mechanical ventilation are not considered enclosed spaces. a. Per the energy code, a duct shaft is considered an unconditioned space. b. or the purposes of this specification, the mechanical rooms will be considered an unconditioned space. 4. Seal Class/Level A is defined as the sealing of all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant. 5. Seal Class/Level B is defined as the sealing of all transverse joints, and longitudinal seams. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant. 6. Seal Class/Level C is defined as the sealing of transverse joints only. C. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible." 2. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower Located in an Unconditioned Space: Seal Class A. 3. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) Located in Unconditioned Space: Seal Class A. 4. Exhaust Ducts Located in an Unconditioned Space: Seal Class C. 5. Return-Air Ducts Located in an Unconditioned Space: Seal Class B. METAL DUCTS

92 6. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class C. 7. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class B. 8. Exhaust Ducts Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class B. 9. Return-Air Ducts Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class C. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. G. Installation of Wire Hanger (Gripple Hangers) 1. The wire (Gripple) hangers shall be fixed / attached to the existing building structure. 2. Grip Loop end can be wrapped around purlins, beams, roof trusses and other accessible building features. 3. Grip Stud end can be fixed / attached with suitable anchors into concrete ceilings and structures, metal decking and pressed metal brackets (using nuts). 4. Grip Toggle end can be fixed / attached to profile roof cladding, light fittings and luminaries. 5. Other wire rope (Gripple) systems can be fixed / attached to an approved structure, as determined by the Engineer. The Wire (Gripple) hangers shall not be attached to any other services, without the approval of the Engineer. 6. All end fixings must be supplied by the same manufacturer as the wire rope. There shall be no mix and match parts and or wire of varying manufacturers. METAL DUCTS

93 7. It is recommended that the ductwork be installed low and adjusted upwards to the required level with the Gripple. a. Should the object require lowering, the grip can be unlocked using a setting key allowing the suspension to be lowered or lengthened. When unlocking the grip, the weight of the suspended object must be independently supported. 8. The wire rope must not be damaged, twisted or deformed in any way prior to, or during, installation. Any such wire rope that is damaged, twisted or deformed in any way must be discarded and replaced. 9. When installing wire (Gripple) hangers the angle between the ropes when exiting the Gripple must never exceed 60 degrees. 10. Lubricants, paint or any other coating should not be applied to the wire (Gripple) hanger as it may impair its performance. 11. Wire (Gripple) hangers should always be installed in accordance with all the manufacturer s recommendations. 12. The use of Gripple cable hangers on Insulated duct is a permitted installation under the guidelines of SMACNA. When Gripple hangers are used on insulated ducts, the following installation technique shall be followed: a. When installing Gripple cable hangers on the outside of the insulation, care must be taken not to damage insulation. Where the cable comes into physical contact with the insulation, the Installer shall use plastic sheathing over the cable. Gripple recommends model H-SLEEVE-2MM for No. 2 cable and H-SLEEVE-3MM for No. 3 cable. b. or externally insulated rectangular ductwork systems use the Gripple Wire Duct Hanger Systems, with cradle and corner saddles to provide uniform support and to prevent puncturing the vapor barrier. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.7 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. METAL DUCTS

94 B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (750 Pa): Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Plan a. The Contractor shall develop an indoor air quality (IAQ) plan based upon the 2000 SMACNA DUCT CLEANLINESS OR NEW CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES. b. This IAQ plan shall address procedures that the Contractor will implement on any commercial duct installation project to reduce the potential for duct contamination being introduced during ductwork installation. c. If a satisfactory plan is developed, submitted and enforced, the duct cleaning paragraphs of this specification can be omitted. 2. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 3. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. METAL DUCTS

95 B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated duct. Patch insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, condensate drain pans, and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, or duct accessories. 4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. METAL DUCTS

96 3.9 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. All ductwork noted as flat oval duct shall be round double wall internally insulated ductwork with flat oval double wall internally insulated fittings G90 finish. B. The following conceal ducts shall be fabricated with single wall rectangular or round galvanized sheet steel. 1. Supply Ducts: a. Ducts Downstream of Air Terminal Units: 1) Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Ducts from Roof Top Units: 2. Return Ducts: 1) Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). a. Return ducts: 3. Exhaust Ducts: 1) Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa). a. Ducts Connected to ans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: C. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1) Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa). 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. D. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and igure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." METAL DUCTS

97 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Welded. d. Adjustable 5 piece elbows may be used only at connections to diffusers. All 5- piece elbows used must be 26 gauge or heavier. E. Branch Configuration:. Liner: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in with air scoop or high efficiency takeoff fitting (HETO). 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and lexible," igure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and igure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. b. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral. 1. Supply Air Ducts / Plenums: ibrous glass, Type I 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick. 2. Return Air Ducts / Plenums: ibrous glass, Type I 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick. 3. Transfer Ducts: ibrous glass, Type I 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 4. Duct Liner Application Schedule a. Line the first 10 lineal feet of supply and return ductwork routing to/from roof top units shall be provided with duct liner. METAL DUCTS

98 G. Ductwork Material Schedule: Ductwork Material Schedule: Air System Exposed and Concealed lat-oval Supply and Return Air Duct Concealed Rectangular and Round Supply Concealed Rectangular and Round Return Concealed Exhaust/Toilet Exhaust Exposed Exhaust/Toilet Exhaust All Rectangular and Round Ducts in Mechanical Rooms Material Double wall insulated with a G90 finish Galvanized steel, manufactured single wall ductwork Galvanized steel, manufactured single wall ductwork Galvanized steel Double wall insulated with a solid inner liner and a G90 finish Galvanized rectangular ductwork with traverse duct connector systems or galvanized round with flanged duct connections END O SECTION METAL DUCTS

99 SECTION PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components and accessories: 1. Casings. 2. ans. 3. Motors. 4. Rotary heat exchangers. 5. Coils. 6. Refrigerant circuit components. 7. Air filtration. 8. Gas furnaces. 9. Dampers. 10. Electrical power connections. 11. Economizer Section 12. Sound Attenuation Package 13. Controls. 14. Accessories. 15. Roof curbs. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: or each RTU. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 INORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. ield quality-control reports. B. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

100 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. AHRI Compliance: 1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger. B. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. C. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." E. NPA Compliance: Comply with NPA 90A or NPA 90B.. UL Compliance: Comply with UL G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 MANUACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AAON. 2. Annexair 3. Carrier Corporation, a unit of United Technologies Corp. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

101 4. Daikin Applied. 5. Trane. 6. YORK, a Johnson Controls Company. 2.3 CASINGS A. General abrication Requirements for Casings: ormed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. B. Double-Wall Construction: ill space between walls with 2-inch (50-mm) antimicrobial insulation and seal moisture tight for R-13 performance. C. Exterior Casing Material: 1. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit s surface shall be tested 672 hours in a spray test in compliance with ASTM B45. Structural members shall be a minimum of 16-gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20-gauge. 2. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seam existing, it shall be double-hemmed and gasket-sealed. D. Inner Casing abrication Requirements: Inside Casing: G-90-coated galvanized steel. E. Panels: Water- and air-tight hinged panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, ERV and power exhaust fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section. Door hardware shall be oriented to allow the door swing to be reversed. 1. Latches with hold down hook will be factory installed on hinged access doors.. Condensate Drain Pans: abricated using stainless-steel sheet inch (0.715 mm) thick, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and construction of drain pans. 1. Double-Wall Construction: ill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE H. Provide openings on the base for power, control and gas connections. I. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

102 2.4 ANS A. Supply-Air ans: Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. 1. Direct-Driven Supply-Air ans: Motor shall be resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. 2. an shall be factory wire to on-board Variable requency Drive and shall be equipped with slide out service access. B. Condenser-Coil an: Shall be direct-drive vertical discharge design with low-noise corrosion resistant glass reinforced polypropylene props, powder coated wire discharge guards and electroplated motor mounting brackets. ans shall be statically and dynamically balances. Condenser fans to be controlled via VD or ECM motor to maintain adjustable pressure. C. Relief-Air an: Backward inclined, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor. D. Airflow Station: 1. Outside Air Inlet shall have a factory installed airflow measurement with PID control output. 2. Supply fan shall have a factory installed piezometer airflow measuring ring installed on the outlet of the cone. 3. Exhaust fan shall have a factory installed piezometer airflow measuring ring installed on the outlet of the cone. E. Shaft grounding rings shall be factory provided on both the supply and exhaust/relief fan motors. 2.5 MOTORS A. Comply with Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and the requirements of this Article. B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. C. All fan motors shall be premium efficiency ODP and meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 2005/10 (EPACT). D. All fan motors shall either be permanently lubricated and/or have internal thermal overload protection. E. Outdoor fan motors shall be premium efficient motors. 2.6 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER A. Heat exchanger integral with unit. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

103 B. Casing: 1. Steel with standard factory-painted finish. 2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section. 3. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings having extended grease fittings or permanently lubricated bearings. Support horizontal rotors on tapered roller bearing. C. Rotor: Aluminum segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes OR - polymer segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes impregnated with nonmigrating, water-selective, molecular-sieve desiccant coating. 1. The media must be coated to resist corrosion. 2. All surfaces must be coated with a non-migrating desiccant layer to insure that adequate latent capacity is provided. The desiccant coating must be firmly bounded to the aluminum surface and will not be dislodged when challenged with high velocity air up to 5,000 feet per minute. Products that loose desiccant when served with high velocity air are not acceptable. 3. The cassette must be a slide out design for service ability. 4. The media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water, or light detergent without degrading the latent recovery. D. Sensible and latent recovery efficiencies must be clearly documents through a testing program conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84 and AHRI The testing must have been conducted by a qualified independent organization. The performance test reports must be provided for engineering review as part of the submittals for this project. E. The rotor design shall ensure laminar airflow to minimize parasitic pressure loss and to optimize the operating efficiency of the system fans. The pressure loss shall be accounted for in the internal pressure loss of the unit.. The rotor media shall be permanent, with an anticipated life of 20 years. It must be tested in accordance with ASTM Standard E-84 and provide smoke and flame spread ratings of less than 25 and 50 as required by NPA 90A and UL A copy of the ASTM E-84 test report confirming the method of test and results shall be provided with the submittal. Heat recovery wheels incorporating throw-away media and tested to UL900 for Class 2 filters are not acceptable. G. The rotor shall be supplied with perimeter brush seals and face contract seals to minimize air leakage and wheel bypass. H. The rotor media shall be supported by a structural aluminum hub and aluminum reinforcing spoke system. The rotor bearings must be greaseable and provide L10 life in excess of 20 years. I. The cassette framework shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent corrosion. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

104 J. Drive: 1. The rotor must be driven by long-life polyurethane/polyester composite link belt system. The rotor/cassette shall be designed so that belt can be removed or serviced without the removal of the bearing. 2. Variable speed control is required for frost prevention, it must be accomplished by the use of a factory installed and wired A/C inverter. The variable speed drive system shall allow for a minimum 60:1 turndown ratio. 2.7 COILS A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Copper tubes mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin. 2. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The coils shall be leak tested to 500 psig and pressure tested to 500 psig. 3. Coil shall be four interlaced rows B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Coil shall have a fin designed for ease of cleaning. 2. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The coils shall be leak tested to 500 psig and pressure tested to 500 psig. 3. Condenser coil shall be provided with factory installed hail guards. 2.8 RERIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Lead/1 st Circuit Compressor: Hermetic, digital scroll type compressor with ability to fully modulate from 20% to 100%. B. Lag/2 nd Circuit Compressor: Hermetic, single stage compressor. C. Each compressor shall have internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater. D. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

105 2.9 AIR ILTRATION A. Unit shall be equipped with a 4-inched filter rack upstream of the evaporator with MERV 13 filters MODULATING INDIRECT GAS-IRED URNACE A. Description: actory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 and NPA CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. B. Burners: Stainless steel. 1. uel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor. C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel. D. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit and approved for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils in units mounted outdoors. Threaded gas connection shall terminate at manual shut-off valve provided with unit. Provide capability for sidewall or thru-base gas piping E. The unit shall have fully modulating, high turndown and indirect gas-fired heat. The heating section will include high turn-down burners firing into individual stainless steel tubular heat exchangers. The heat exchangers shall be constructed of type 409 stainless steel and be a tubular design capable of draining internal condensate. External flue to be constructed of type stainless steel and be fully insulated. Units with multiple heaters shall include one fully modulating high turndown heater with additional on-off heater sections. Total heater turndown shall be a minimum of 10:1 or higher.. Timed freeze stat shall monitor heat output and shall discontinue all heating attempts and or unit operation in the event the heating section fails to ignite or fails to maintain programmed supply air temperature/time. G. Inducer fan shall be direct drive high pressure centrifugal type with two speeds and shall include built- in thermal overload protection DAMPERS A. Leakage Rate: Comply with ASHRAE/IES B. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 1. Outdoor Air Damper. 2. Return Air Mixing Damper. 3. Exhaust/Relief air damper. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

106 C. Unit shall include a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of galvanized steel, and air foil blades with rubber edge seals. Linkage shall be concealed out of airstream, within the damper frame to reduce pressure and noise. Damper assembly shall be controlled by a spring return two position or fully modulating actuator. Dampers shall not be sized for air velocities exceeding 2000 fpm ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted non-fused disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection. B. ield wiring access to be provided thru base into isolated enclosure with removeable cover. C. Provide overcurrent protection rated for capacity noted on the schedule. D. Provide factory wired phase monitor ECONOMIZER SECTION A. Provide, a factory installed power exhaust assembly that shall be designed to ventilate return air to atmosphere. B. an wheel shall be direct drive plenum fan, factory installed and wired to on-board Variable requency Drive Other fan construction is not acceptable. C. an mount to be fixed. D. Economizer to be provided with modulating outdoor air and return air dampers for enthalpy control SOUND ATTENUATION PACKAGE A. The unit is equipped with variable speed, ECM or VD controlled condenser fans to reduce sound and increase performance. B. Unit must be provided with active head pressure control. C. Compressor sound blanket must also be provided. D. Sound Power: Radiated from condenser casing for RTU-1 & RTU st Octave: 68.7 db. 2. 2nd Octave: 79.5 db. 3. 3rd Octave: 84.8 db. 4. 4th Octave: 88.8 db. 5. 5th Octave: 87.4 db. 6. 6th Octave: 82.6 db. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

107 7. 7th Octave: 76.5 db. 8. 8th Octave: 69.6 db. 9. Total: 92.9 dba 2.15 CONTROLS A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." B. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Unit-Mounted Touch Screen Panel for Each Unit: C. DDC Controller: a. Display showing cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure. b. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters. Adjusting set points. c. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. d. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. e. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. f. Monitoring cooling load. g. Monitoring economizer cycles. h. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume. 1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Provide BACnet compatible interface to BAS. 3. Discharge Air Control with BACNET a. The resident control algorithms will make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor temperature and humidity as well as input from the BAS indoor space temperature. The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized microprocessor will provide anti-short cycle timing for a higher level of machine protection. Terminals are provided for a field installed dry contact or switch closure to put the unit in the Occupied or Unoccupied modes. 4. Multi Zone VAV Control with BACNET a. The resident control algorithms will make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor temperature and humidity as well as signals from the BAS. The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized micro-processor will provide antishort cycle timing for a higher level of machine protection. Terminals are PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

108 provided for a field installed dry contact or switch closure to put the unit in the Occupied or Unoccupied modes. A factory provided static pressure sensor will be shipped with the unit for installation inside the supply ductwork ACCESSORIES A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open. B. ilter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss. C. Safeties: 1. Provision for connection of smoke detector (provided by others). 2. Condensate overflow switch. 3. Phase-loss protection. 4. High and low pressure control. 5. Gas furnace airflow-proving switch. D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire. E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open. G. Outdoor-air intake weather hood with moisture eliminator. H. Oil separator. I. Service Lights and Switch: actory installed in fan section with weatherproof cover. actory wire lights to a single-point field connection ROO CURBS A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factoryinstalled wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Application: actory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I. b. Mechanical asteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

109 c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I. B. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches (355 mm) with vibration isolation with 1-inch spring deflection, 18 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing with anchor bolts. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. C. Where installing piping adjacent to RTUs, allow space for service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section "acility Natural- Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. D. Connect electrical wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." E. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

110 . Install nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 3.3 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and airdistribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. END O SECTION PACKAGED, ROOTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

111 SECTION INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electric radiation heaters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: or each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures. 4. Indicate location and size of each field connection. 5. Include enclosure joints and other accessories. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: Provide color samples Runtal colors Grey Brown 8019 and Runtal White 9010R. 1.3 INORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. ield quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Runtal North America, Inc. 2. INDECCO INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

112 B. Description: actory-packaged units constructed according to UL 499, UL 1030, and UL The heating panel shall be of one-piece construction, consisting of flattened panels welded to floor pedestals. 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element enclosed in metallic sheath mechanically bonded to fins, with high-temperature cutout and sensor running the full length of the element. Element supports shall eliminate thermal expansion noise. D. Dimension: Radiator is inches tall and a 2.25-inch depth. Provide with the scheduled lengths, heating capacities and style as scheduled. E. loor-mounted Pedestals: Pedestal-mounting bracket shall be solid panel matching front panel and include a cover to conceal conduit for power and control wiring.. Support Brackets: Provide intermediate wall brackets for support as required to maintain UL listing. G. Cover: The radiators shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09-inch minimum) all-welded perforated top grille, which will cover the top of all of the finned areas. H. inish: The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat finish. The radiator is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002 to inches). The color shall be selected from the standard color finishes. I. Accessories: 1. Pedestal trim knockout plugs for electrical connections. 2. Center trim cover for a wall-to-wall look. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings. C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure. D. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall. E. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls. INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

113 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground electric finned-tube radiation heaters according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END O SECTION INNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

114 INTERIOR INISH LIST CARPET: CPT-1: MANUACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT STYLE: EXPANSE TILE 5T219 COLOR: SLOPE SIZE: 12" x 48" NOTES: STAGGER INSTALL LOCATION: CARPET TILE RUG INSERTS CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE michele.leise@shawinc.com CPT-2 MANUACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT STYLE: EXPOSE TILE 5T151 COLOR: PAST SIZE: 9" x 36" NOTES: ASHLAR INSTALL LOCATION: CONERENCE ROOMS CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE michele.leise@shawinc.com CPT-3 MANUACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT STYLE: WELCOME II TILE 5T031 COLOR: BLACK CHOCOLATE SIZE: 24" x 24" NOTES: QUARTER-TURN INSTALL LOCATION: VESTIBULE CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE michele.leise@shawinc.com CPT-4 MANUACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT STYLE: BEYOND 5A243 COLOR: SLOPE SIZE: BROADLOOM LOCATION: RONT STAIR CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE michele.leise@shawinc.com PAINT: P-1: MANUACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW 7030 ANEW GRAY NOTES: TYPICAL WALL COLOR PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC P-2: MANUACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW 9184 OXHALL GREEN NOTES: ACCENT WALL COLOR PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC P-3: MANUACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW 7758 HIGH RELECTIVE WHITE PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC P-4: MANUACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: SW7069 IRON ORE STAIN: ST-1: MANUACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: TO MATCH CEILING AT ROOM 105 LOCATION: SEE INISH SCHEDULE OR LOCATION SPEC SECTION: VINYL WALLCOVERING: VWC-1: MANUACTURER: D.L. COUCH STYLE: CONNEXION A164 COLOR: QUARRY 897 LOCATION: RECEPTION HALLS ROLLER SHADES: RS-1: MANUACTURER: MECHOSHADE STYLE: MECHO/5 DRIVE END BRACKET W/ASCIA ABRIC: THERMOVEIL DENSE BASKET WEAVE PATTERN: 1500 SERIES (3% OPEN) COLOR: 1519 SILVER BIRCH LOCATION: CONERENCE ROOM 207 CC-1 SURACE: 1. EXPOSED CONCRETE AND PRECAST CONCRETE CEILINGS, INCLUDING CONDUITS, JUNCTION BOXES, PENDANTS, PIPE, ITTINGS, DUCTS, DIUSERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS, ETC: 2. EXPSOED STRUCTURE 3. TRUSSES: 4. EXPOSED JOISTS: 5. STEEL COLUMNS: 6. OTHER STRUCTURAL STEEL: 7. METAL HANDRAILS AND BRACKETS: 8. WOOD BASE: 9. HOLLOW METAL DOOR RAMES: 10. HOLLOW METAL SIDELITES: 11. HOLLOW METAL TRANSOMS: 12. WOOD DOOR RAMES: 13. WOOD SIDELITES: 14. WOOD TRANSOMS: 15. WOOD WINDOW RAMES: 16. METAL DOOR AND RAMES O ELEVATORS: 17. LOOR ACCESS DOOR: 18. WALL ACCESS DOOR: 19. CEILING ACCESS DOOR: EXTERIOR PAINTS: COLOR: CLAY MASONRY UNITS: COLOR: P-1 SYSTEM: MPI EXT 4.1A INTERMEDIATE COAT: LATEX, EXTERIOR, MATCH TOPCOAT TOPCOAT: MPI #11 GLOSS LEVEL 5 AS SCHEDULED AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS MATCH SURACE ON WHICH IT OCCURS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS MATCH SURACE ON WHICH IT OCCURS MATCH SURACE ON WHICH IT OCCURS MATCH SURACE ON WHICH IT OCCURS STEEL AND IRON SUBSTRATES: COLOR: P-4 SYSTEM: MPI EXT 5.1C PRIMER COAT: ALKYD, ANTI-CORROSIVE OR METAL, MPI #79 INTERMEDIATE COAT: LIGHT INDUSTRIAL, EXTERIOR, WATER BASE, MATCHING TOPCOAT TOPCOAT: MPI # 163 GLOSS LEVEL 5 WOOD SUBSTRATES: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: COLOR: MATCH ARCHITECTS SAMPLE SYSTEM: MPI EXT 6.3L PRIMECOAT: PRIMER, LATEX OR EXTERIOR WOOD, MPI #6 INTERMEDIATE COAT: LATEX, EXTERIOR, MATCHING TOPCOAT TOPCOAT: MPI #11 GLOSS LEVEL 5 _ROOM INISH SCHEDULE_ ROOM WALL NUMBER NAME LOOR INISH BASE INISH MATERIAL NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST 0S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3-1, M1, M2 0S4 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK EXIST EXIST STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1-1E1 ELEVATOR PT , W9 1S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3-1, M1, M2 1S2 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 1, M1, M2 1S3 STAIR CPT-4 WD-1 BRICK P-1 EXIST P-1 EXIST EXISTING 2 1S4 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1-2S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 GWB/BRICK P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 P-3 1, M1, M2 2S2 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 CMU/GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 1, M1, M2 2S3 STAIR PT-1/CPT-4 WD-1 GWB/BRICK EXIST EXIST - EXIST P VESTIBULE CPT-3 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 - ST-1/P-4 W3 101 RETAIL PT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST BRICK - EXIST BRICK ST-1/P-4 2, W3 102 TASTING ROOM PT-1/CT-3/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB - EXIST P-1 EXIST ST-1/P-4 1, 2, W1, W3 103 STORAGE PT-1 RB-1 GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P LOUNGE PT-1/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST P-1 EXIST EXISTING 1, WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 - P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 107 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 - P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 108 CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK - P-1 EXIST P RECEPTION HALL PT-1 WB-1 GWB VWC-1/EXIST VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-4 2, W3, W4, W CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB - VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-3 2, W A/V SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 - W7 112 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 113 WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 114 MECH/ELEC SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P CONERENCE ROOM CPT-2 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-2 P-1 P-1 P CATERING STAGING CC-1 PT-2 PB-2 GWB RP-1/P-1 RP-1/P-1 RP-1/P-1 RP-1/P-1 P-3 2, W5, W12 CC STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P OICE CPT-1 RB-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 P BAR CT-3 - BRICK - EXIST BRICK - EXIST BRICK ST-1/P OOD PREP PT-2 PB-2 GWB RP-1/P-1 RP-1/P-1/CT-2 RP-1/P-1 RP-1/P-1 - W5, W12 CC MECH/ELEC/CUST CC-1 PT-2 PB-2 GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 - W KEG COOLER PT-2 PB-2 GWB W8, W PRIVATE TASTING PT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST P-2 EXIST ST-1/P-4 2, W3, W CHASE 201 BAR PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK - - P-1 EXIST P GALLERY PT-1/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB - EXIST P-1 EXIST/P-1 P-4 1, 2, W1, W3 203 WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 204 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 2, 5, W1, W2, W4, W6 205 CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 EXIST P RECEPTION HALL PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK VWC-1/EXIST VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-4 2, W3, W4, W CONERENCE ROOM CPT-2 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-2 P-1 P STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB/BRICK P-3 EXIST EXIST P-3 P MECH/ELEC SC-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 P CATERING STAGING CC-1 PT-2 PB-2 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1-2, W12 CC ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM SC-1 - GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P ELEVATOR LOBBY PT-1 WD-1 GWB/BRICK WVC-1 VWC-1 - EXIST P OUTDOOR SEATING M3 SHEEN: EGGSHELL EGGSHELL SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS EGGSHELL SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS SEMI-GLOSS EGGSHELL EGGSHELL EGGSHELL CC-1 TILE: Ceiling inish CT-1: MANUACTURER: DALTILE STYLE: KEYSTONES COLOR: DK16 ARCTIC WHITE/BLACK SIZE: 1" HEXAGON LOCATION: BATHROOM LOOR TILE GROUT: MAPEI, 47 CHARCOAL SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN amanda.balhorn@daltile.com CT-2: MANUACTURER: IRIS CERAMICS STYLE: MAY COLOR: OLIVE SIZE: 4" x 8" LOCATION: BATHROOM WAINSCOTTING GROUT: MAPEI, 38 AVALANCHE INSTALLATION: REER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: ANDREA MCCUNE amccune@midwesttile.com CT-3: MANUACTURER: DALTILE STYLE: UPTOWN GLASS COLOR: CARRARA UP23 SIZE: 1" HEXAGON LOCATION: BAR RONT GROUT: MAPEI, 93 WARM GRAY SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN amanda.balhorn@daltile.com PT-1: MANUACTURER: LORIDA TILE STYLE: CELLAR COLOR: TONE SIZE: 8" x 36" LOCATION: MAIN LOOR TILE GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE INSTALLATION: ASHLAR SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: TARA MILLER tara.miller@sunderlands.com PT-2: MANUACTURER: DALTILE STYLE: VOLUME 1.0 COLOR: ACCENT BROWN VL78 SIZE: 12" x 12" LOCATION: PREP AREAS GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE INSTALLATION: LAID STRAIGHT SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN amanda.balhorn@daltile.com RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES: RB-1: MANUACTURER: JOHNSONITE STYLE: WALL BASE COLOR: 63 BURNT UMBER SIZE: 4", COVED BASE AT HARD SURACES, STRAIGHT BASE AT CARPETED SURACES RST-1: MANUACTURER: JOHNSONITE STYLE: RUBBER TREAD WITH INTEGRAL RISER COLOR: RAISED ROUNDS 63 BURNT UMBER, NO INSERT SIZE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS LOCATION: BACK O HOUSE STAIRS RT-1: MANUACTURER: JOHNSONITE COLOR: RAISED ROUNDS 63 BURNT UMBER SIZE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS LOCATION: BACK O HOUSE STAIRS MILLWORK COMMENTS PB-2: MANUACTURER: DALTILE STYLE: VOLUME 1.0 COLOR: ACCENT BROWN VL78 SIZE: COVE BASE 6" X 12" NUMBER: P-36C9 LOCATION: PREP AREAS GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE INSTALLATION: LAID STRAIGHT SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN amanda.balhorn@daltile.com WV-1 SPECIES: WALNUT COLOR: TO MATCH PT-1 LOCATION: CONERENCE ROOM AND BAR MILLWORK SPEC SECTION: OS-1 DISTRIBUTER: GMS WERKS STONE: BROWN ONYX SPEC SECTION: CONTACT: TERRY BORTOLOTTI estimates@gmswerks.com GR-1 DISTRIBUTER: GMS WERKS STONE: GRANIITE, COLOR TBD, $70/S INSTALL ALLOWANCE CONTACT: TERRY BORTOLOTTI estimates@gmswerks.com QS-1 MANUACTURER: DUPONT STYLE: ZODIAQ QUARTZ COLOR: NEVE LOCATION: BATHROOM AND CONERENCE COUNTERTOPS QS-2 MANUACTURER: DUPONT STYLE: ZODIAQ QUARTZ COLOR: PAPYRUS LOCATION: BACK BAR COUNTERTOPS GRID: SUPRAINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE CC-1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS: ROOM INISH SCHEDULE SPECIIC NOTES (these notes are referenced in the notes column of the room finish schedules) LOOR NOTES: 1. SEE SHEET A13.1 OR LOORING LOCATIONS AND TRANSITIONS. 2. THIN-SET CERAMIC TILE LOORS. 3. NOT USED 4. NOT USED 5. SEE DETAIL 15/A11.2 OR LOOR TILE TO WALL TILE TRANSITION WALL NOTES: W1. SEE SHEET A12.1 OR CERAMIC TILE WALL ELEVATIONS. W2. CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT TO 5'-0" ABOVE INISH LOOR. W3. PAINT EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS AND CROSS BRACING P-4. W4. REER TO SHEET A12.1 OR WALL ELEVATIONS INDICATING SPECIIC WALL INISH LOCATIONS. W5. RP PANEL TO 8'-0" (ONE PANEL HEIGHT) ABOVE INISH LOOR, PAINT REMAINDER O WALL TO CEILING. W6. SEE DETAIL 15/11.2 OR TILE TO PAINTED GWB TRANSITION. W7. PROVIDE PLYWOOD BACKBOARD WHERE INDICATED ON SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS. PLYWOOD TO BE 4' x 8', 3/4" THICK, INTERIOR-GRADE, IRE-RETARDANT-TREATED AND PAINTED P-3. MOUNT 4" A... W8. WALL INISHES BY SUPPLIER W9. ELEVATOR SHAT PAINTED P-3 TO 10' A... W10. LEVEL 5 GWB INISH THIS ROOM OR WALLCOVERING INSTALLATION. W11. WB-1 ON SOUTH WALL TO BE PAINTED P-2 W12. ENSURE THAT EACH COVE BASE GROUT LINE LINES UP WITH LOOR TILE GROUT LINE. CEILING NOTES: C1. SEE RELECTED CEILING PLANS OR CEILING ACCENT PAINT COLORS AND LOCATIONS. C2. PAINT EXPOSED STEEL DECK P-4. C2. PAINT EXPOSED STRUCTURE P-4, U.N.O. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS: M1. PAINT HANDRAILS P-4. M2. PAINT MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AT STAIR (STRINGERS, APC-1 HANDRAILS, STEEL PANS, ETC) P-4. MANUACTURER: ARMSTRONG STYLE: ULTIMA M3. GRANITE (GR-1) DRINK RAIL, THIS AREA. COLOR: WHITE SIZE: 24" X 24" GRID: SUPRAINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE APC-2 MANUACTURER: AMERICAN TIN CEILINGS STYLE: #23 COLOR: ARTISAN SILVER WASHED GOLD SIZE: 24" X 24" GRID: SUPRAINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE APC-3 MANUACTURER: ARMSTRONG STYLE: KITCHEN ZONE COLOR: WHITE SIZE: 24" X 24" GRID: SUPRAINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE CC-1 ROOM INISH SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES A. ROOM INISH SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL ROOM INISH SCHEDULE SHEETS. B. SEE SPECIICATIONS OR PAINTING O ITEMS NOT NOTED IN THE ROOM INISH SCHEDULE. C. EXPOSED CONCRETE LOOR SLABS NOT SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE A INISH SHALL RECEIVE A CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. D. ALL GYPSUM WALLBOARD BULKHEADS SHALL BE PAINTED P-3 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. E. CEILING HEIGHTS, AS NOTED ON THE RELECTED CEILING, PLANS ARE MEASURED ROM THE INISH LOOR O THE ROOM.. CONTRACTOR SHALL URNISH AND INSTALL WALL BASE AROUND CASEWORK AND MILLWORK. G. WHERE LOOR INISH CHANGES ROM ONE ROOM TO ANOTHER, SET JOINT O THE MATERIALS AT THE CENTER O THE COMMUNICATING DOOR. H. SEE RELECTED CEILING PLANS OR CEILING TYPES AND HEIGHT. I. WHERE WOOD BASE (WB-1) IS SPECIIED, USE PAINTED POPLAR 4" HIGH BY 1/2" DEEP. PRIMED ON ALL SIDES AND PAINTED P-1, U.N.O. SEE SPEC SECTION J. SEE SHEET A9.1 OR PAINTED DOOR AND WINDOW RAMES. K. SEE INISH LOOR PLANS OR TILE CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS. GENERAL NOTES 1. GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE ACTUAL AND ARE TO ACE O METAL STUDS, ACE O MASONRY, ACE O EXISTING CONSTRUCTION OR CENTERLINE O COLUMN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL URNISH AND INSTALL 2" X 6" CONTINUOUS WOOD BLOCKING OR LAT METAL STRAPPING IN STUD PARTITIONS OR ANCHORAGE O WALL ATTACHED ITEMS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE OLLOWING: GRAB BARS, VANITY UNITS, TOILET ACCESSORIES, WALL CABINETS, AND WALL MOUNTED IXTURES 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL MECHANICAL CHASE SIZES WITH MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR. 5. WALL OPENINGS OR IRE DAMPERS SHALL BE RAMED PER THE IRE DAMPER MANUACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SIZES AND LOCATIONS O 4" HIGH CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS WITH THE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS. 7. LOCATE CONTROL JOINTS (CJ) AND CONTROL JOINTS ABOVE (CJA) WHERE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. SEE DETAILS ON A10.1 AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ISOLATE GYPSUM BOARD SURACES WITH CONTROL JOINTS WHERE: A) CEILING ABUTS A STRUCTURAL ELEMENT, DISSIMILAR WALL OR PARTITION OR OTHER VERTICAL PENETRATION. B) CONSTRUCTION CHANGES WITHIN PLANES O THE CEILING. C) CEILING RUN EXCEEDS 30 LINEAL EET. D) CONTROL JOINTS OCCUR IN STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS O THE BUILDING. E) PARTITION OR URRING RUN EXCEEDING 30 L.. 8. ELECTRICAL PLANS INDICATE THE GENERAL DESIGN AND ARRANGEMENT O PIPES, CONDUIT, WIRING, EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS, ETC. INORMATION SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC IN CHARACTER AND DOES NOT NECESSARILY INDICATE EVERY REQUIRED OSET, ITTING AND EXISTING CONDITION. LOCATION O THESE ITEMS MAY BE ADJUSTED CONDITIONAL UPON THE SATISACTORY COMPLIANCE WITH ALL OTHER REQUIREMENTS. 9. SEE PLANS OR IRE EXTINGUISHER (E) AND IRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET (EC) LOCATIONS. 10. SEE SHEET CP1.1 OR LOCATIONS O IRE RATED WALLS WHERE APPLICABLE. 11. ALL WALL PENETRATIONS AT RATED WALL LOCATIONS REQUIRED OR PIPES, CONDUIT, DUCTING ETC. SHALL BE SEALED TO STOP PASSAGE O IRE AND / OR SMOKE WITH IRE SAING AND APPROVED IRESTOPPING SEALANT PER DETAILS ON SHEET CP THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE CUT- OUTS OR CASEWORK, MILLWORK, OR OTHER EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED. 14. ALL ASPECTS O THE WORK AND ITEMS NOT SPECIICALLY MENTIONED, BUT WHICH ARE NECESSARY TO MAKE A COMPLETE WORKING INSTALLATION, SHALL BE INCLUDED, AND INDICATED IN THE CONTRACTORS BID. 15. NO ASBESTOS OR PCB CONTAINING MATERIALS SHALL BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. 16. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ALL SUBCONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE OR PROPER REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL O ALL DEBRIS GENERATED BY CONSTRUCTION O THIS PROJECT. THE REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL O ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS SHALL BE IN ULL COMPLIANCE WITH ALL EDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS. THE PREMISES SHALL BE KEPT CLEAN AND REE ROM ALL WASTE MATERIALS. 17. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT NEW CONSTRUCTION ROM DAMAGE BY ALL TRADES. ALL SUCH DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR DURING THE COURSE O THIS WORK SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. 18. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE OR IELD VERIICATION O ALL DIMENSIONS AND IELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING OR INSTALLING MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT. 19. ALL PIPING AND CONDUITS SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS, UNDERGROUND, ABOVE CEILINGS OR IN ARCHITECT APPROVED UTILITY SPACES IN ALL CASES UNLESS SPECIICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. EXPOSED ITEMS MUST BE LOCATED IN AREAS APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. EXPOSED ITEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND INISHED TO PROVIDE MINIMAL VISUAL IMPACT. ALL EXPOSED ITEMS ARE TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT SURACES UNLESS SCHEDULED OR AN ACCENT COLOR. 20. LOOR SPOT ELEVATIONS ARE SHOWN THUS: 0'-0" 21. ARCHITECTURAL INISH LOOR ELEVATIONS 100'-0" EQUALS ACTUAL SITE REERENCE O INISH LOOR: PLAN SYMBOL INDICATES WALL TYPE - SEE SHEET A0.1 OR DESCRIPTION O WALL TYPES 23. SCRIBE GYPSUM BOARD O WALLS AND PARTITIONS TO IRREGULARITIES O STRUCTURE AND ROO DECK ABOVE. 24. PROVISIONS SHALL BE MADE AT ULL HEIGHT NON- BEARING WALLS OR 2- INCH VERTICAL MOVEMENT O THE BUILDING STRUCTURE WITHOUT TRANSER O COMPRESSIVE LOADS TO WALL. ILL IRREGULARITIES BETWEEN TOP O WALL AND DECK ABOVE WITH IRE SAING INSULATION OR IRE STOPPING MATERIALS AS REQUIRED TO MEET IRE RATING O RESPECTIVE WALLS. ILL AT SMOKE PARTITIONS WITH MATERIALS CAPABLE O RESISTING THE PASSAGE O SMOKE. SEE DETAILS ON CODE RATING DETAIL SHEETS. 25. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR BRACING O NONLOAD BEARING MASONRY WALLS. 26. MASONRY WALLS AND INTERIOR STUD WALLS SHALL EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE O LOOR OR ROO DECK ABOVE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SEE RELECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES. 27. SEAL PENETRATIONS THROUGH IRE-RESISTANCE-RATED CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THROUGH- PENETRATION IRESTOP MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE RESPECTIVE IRE- RESISTIVE RATING AND SMOKE STOPPAGE. SEE DETAILS ON SHEET CP SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE GENERAL NOTES, ROOM INISH SCHEDULE & WALL TYPES A /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions AND ADDITION CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :46:48 AM WALL TYPE GENERAL NOTES A. THE SIDE O THE PARTITION THAT THE WALL TYPE SYMBOL IS LOCATED ON (AS SHOWN ON THE LOOR PLANS), INDICATES THE SIDE O THE PARTITION TO RECEIVE DOUBLE LAYER GYPSUM BOARD. B. SEE CP1.1 OR LOCATIONS O IRE RATED WALLS AND SMOKE PARTITIONS. C. REER TO THE GENERAL NOTES ON SHEET A0.1 OR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING GWB PARTITIONS. D. CONSTRUCT IRE RATED GWB PARTITIONS ACCORDING TO IRE RATED ASSEMBLIES INDICATED BELOW WALL TYPE. E. SEE DETAIL 31/A10.1 OR GWB PARTITION SLIP CONNECTION BELOW LOOR AND ROO DECKS.. SEE DETAIL 52/A10.1 OR CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS AT DOOR RAMES LOCATED IN GWB PARTITIONS. G. SOUND WALLS ARE INDICATED BY THE STC RATING BELOW WALL TYPE. SEE DETAIL 45/A10.1 AND 56/A10.1 OR SOUND WALL DETAILS. SEAL PERIMETER O SOUND WALLS WITH ACOUSTICAL SEALANT. H. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR STEEL STUD WALL RAMING DETAILS. WALL TYPES 1 A A1 NO SOUND ATTENUATION SOUND WALL MIN STC 49 NO SOUND ATTENUATION WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BATT WHERE TILE IS DELINEATED ON ELEVATIONS: 1-LAYER O 5/8" TILE BACKING PANELS 5/8" GWB EACH SIDE 3-5/8" METAL 16" O.C. SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION UL U419 OR 1 HOUR PARTITIONS; REER TO CP1.1 OR LOCATIONS 5/8" GWB 2 1/2" METAL 16" O.C. G G1 B B1 NO SOUND ATTENUATION SOUND WALL MIN STC 49 NO SOUND ATTENUATION WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BATT WHERE TILE IS DELINEATED ON ELEVATIONS: 1-LAYER O 5/8" TILE BACKING PANELS 5/8" GWB EACH SIDE 6" METAL 16" O.C. SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION 5/8" GWB 1-5/8" METAL 16" O.C. C C1 NO SOUND ATTENUATION WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BATT J J1 WHERE TILE IS DELINEATED ON ELEVATIONS: 1-LAYER O 5/8" TILE BACKING PANELS NO SOUND ATTENUATION 5/8" GWB 3-5/8" METAL 16" O.C. SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION 8" CMU; REER TO STRUCTURAL OR REINORCEMENT LOCATIONS WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BATT D SHAT WALL, 1 HOUR, STC 39 UL U415 SYSTEM A K NO SOUND ATTENUATION 1" SHAT LINER 4" C-H METAL 24" O.C. 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD 5/8" GWB 6" METAL 16" O.C. E E1 NO SOUND ATTENUATION SOUND WALL MIN STC 49 (2) LAYERS 5/8" GWB 6" METAL 16" O.C. SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION 5/8" GWB Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

115 LEGEND NOTES KEYNOTE LEGEND ' - 3" 12' - 9" 10' - 5" 2' - 6" 14' - 0" 11' - 6" 13' - 3" A A.1 UP A.5 B 2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' /2" STORAGE 001 A A 5' - 6" 4' - 4" A14 5' - 3" 0S1 STAIR 0S1 A13 A24 STORAGE 002 STAIR 0S4 A15 C 51 A ' - 3" 12' - 9" 10' - 5" 2' - 6" 14' - 0" 13' - 5 5/8" 20' - 0" 8' - 3" 11' - 6" 13' - 3" VERIY 20' - 7 1/2" VERIY A A2.1 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM A A A8.1 4' - 0" 16' - 8" 20' - 0" CJ CJ CJ 1S3 3/4" A16 6" K K A17 A23 12' - 2" VERIY W/ A/V CONTRACTOR 23' - 0" STAIR 1S3 UP STORAGE 103 LOUNGE A7.2 CORRIDOR ' - 0" STORAGE 104 UP STAIR 1S1 1S S2A STAIR 1S2 7" 105B 105A 6' - 0" TASTING ROOM 102 RECEPTION HALL 109 7" A A A.1 A.5 B 2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' /2" A27 A A35 A13 4 1/4" TO INISH ACE A A20 CC-1 A21 A A26 A13 A30 100A VESTIBULE 100 A 100B A A7.1 RETAIL 101 RE. RE. OOD PREP 120 8" 24' - 3" 6' - 6" 2' - 9" 9' - 0" ELEVATOR 1E1 A1 D 109A 2' - 2" C 5' - 0" 4' - 4" 4' - 0" 26 A7.2 CORRIDOR 1S2B MEN'S RESTROOM 112 A17 10' - 0" 4' - 11" 30' - 6" 4' - 9" 3' - 0" 6' - 1" A 2" 3' - 0" 32 A /2" 2" 2" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 14 A / A11.2 PRIVATE TASTING 123 CATERING STAGING 116 CJ STORAGE 117 CONERENCE ROOM 115 MECH/ELEC 114 A18 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 29' - 0" 11' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 4" 9' - 8" 60' - 8" 11 35/ A11.2 A10 BAR A11.1 C 13 A11 109B A/V ' - 4" 1' - 9" ' - 4" 3' - 4" A1 A1 A1 B A7.1 9' - 0" 4' - 4" 11' - 4" KEG COOLER 122 MECH/ELEC/CUST A 115 3' - 4" 39' - 5 1/4" 1' - 9" 6' - 8" 9' - 7" CJ CJ CJ A30 CJ CJ A2 A ' - 2" 3' - 1" CJ CC-1 41 A10.1 1' - 10" 111 8' - 6" 4' - 10" 5' - 9" 14' - 5" 18' - 11" 26 A7.1 1' - 2" 32 A11.2 C C A C 110 A29 24 A11.1 C 7' - 6" OICE 118 B1 A10 A1 1S4 A ' - 0" 116A A1 55 C A1 A7.2 A10 A1 A A7 A28 1' - 4" 3' - 4" 17' - 4" 2' - 11" A10 C 122 A5 117 ICE C WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 A28 D J A7 C 2' - 8" CJ CJ CJ CJ 2' - 4" V 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 22' - 0" 14' - 8" A8 CHASE 124 1' - 7 1/4" 2' - 6" STAIR 1S4 A8.1 UP A A A7.2 70' - 4" A8.2 A5.1 CC-1 A1 ACCESS PANEL; PAINT TO MATCH WALL COLOR A2 RETAIL SHELVING CONSTRUCTED ROM RECLAIMED CEILING JOISTS A5 4" INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL COOLER PANELS BY OOD SERVICE CONTR A7 24"X24" MOP SINK A8 POST INDICATOR VALVE; SEE MECHANICAL A10 OOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SEE OOD SERVICE DRAWINGS A11 HAND WASHING SINK; SEE PLUMBING A13 WOOD HANDRAIL; SEE A8.1 OR HANDRAIL DETAILS A14 ADD 1-LAYER O 5/8" TYPE X GWB THIS SIDE O WALL A15 CONCRETE OUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL A16 INILL WINDOW WITH SALVAGED BRICK; TOOTH IN AT PERIMETER A17 SEMI-RECESSED IRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET A18 BOLLARD, TYP; SEE CIVIL A20 ADD (1) ROW O CABLE TO TOP O ALL RAILINGS TO REDUCE OPENING TO LESS THAN 4". A21 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE AT THE HEAD O ALL EXISTING WINDOWS, TYPICAL. REPLACE DAMAGED SCREENS AS REQUIRED. REPAIR AND PAINT WINDOW TRIM P-4, TYPICAL. A23 PAINT WOOD GUARDRAIL CAP A24 HELICAL PIERS; SEE STRUCTURAL A26 ABRIC AWNING ABOVE A27 RECESSED VIDEO SCREEN BY A/V CONTRACTOR; MAINTAIN 1" PERIMETER GAP AROUND SIDES AND BOTTOM O VIDEO SCREEN, 4" AT TOP; COORDINATE WALL RECESSED DIMENSION WITH A/V CONTRACTOR A28 TV BY OWNER; SEE ELECTRICAL A29 RESTORED DECORATIVE LEADED GLASS WINDOW; HANG ROM STRUCTURE ABOVE A30 STRUCTURAL STOOP; SEE STRUCTURE A35 REMOVABLE PANEL ABOVE OR MECHANICAL UNIT ACCESS; COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. PAINT PANEL TO MATCH ADJANCT SUACE SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE Revisions G 52 A7.1 D E G 41 A5.1 C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :40:24 AM Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION LOOR PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN A /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM AND ADDITION CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 NORTH LOOR PLAN - BASEMENT LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH LOOR PLAN - MAIN LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

116 LEGEND NOTES KEYNOTE LEGEND 1 A A A.1 A.5 B 2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' /2" A7.1 A7.1 A7.1 A21 A20 A23 C A7 24"X24" MOP SINK A10 OOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SEE OOD SERVICE DRAWINGS A11 HAND WASHING SINK; SEE PLUMBING A12 PORCELAIN ROO PAVERS ON PEDESTAL SYSTEM A13 WOOD HANDRAIL; SEE A8.1 OR HANDRAIL DETAILS A16 INILL WINDOW WITH SALVAGED BRICK; TOOTH IN AT PERIMETER A19 NEW CABLE RAILING AT INTERMEDIATE LANDING; MATCH EXISTING SPACING AND DIMENSIONS O CABLES AND SUPPORTS. ADD (1) ROW O CABLE TO TOP O ALL RAILINGS TO REDUCE OPENING TO LESS THAN 4". A20 ADD (1) ROW O CABLE TO TOP O ALL RAILINGS TO REDUCE OPENING TO LESS THAN 4". A21 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE AT THE HEAD O ALL EXISTING WINDOWS, TYPICAL. REPLACE DAMAGED SCREENS AS REQUIRED. REPAIR AND PAINT WINDOW TRIM P-4, TYPICAL. A23 PAINT WOOD GUARDRAIL CAP A27 RECESSED VIDEO SCREEN BY A/V CONTRACTOR; MAINTAIN 1" PERIMETER GAP AROUND SIDES AND BOTTOM O VIDEO SCREEN, 4" AT TOP; COORDINATE WALL RECESSED DIMENSION WITH A/V CONTRACTOR A28 TV BY OWNER; SEE ELECTRICAL A31 ROO HATCH LADDER A33 PREP AND PAINT EXISTING EXTERIOR BRICK; SEE A0.1 OR PAINT COLOR A34 PREP AND PAINT EXISTING EXTERIOR METAL PANEL; SEE A0.1 OR PAINT COLOR CC SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE UP STAIR 2S ' - 0" 8' - 3" 11' - 6" 13' - 3" 1' - 3" 12' - 9" 10' - 5" 2' - 6" 14' - 0" 33 A A A7.1 A ' - 0" 16' - 8" 20' - 0" CJ CJ CJ 21 BAR 201 A WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 A16 3/4" 6" K 12' - 2" VERIY W/ A/V CONTRACTOR 21' - 10" A ' - 6" 3' - 8" CORRIDOR A /4" TO INISH ACE C J 15 2S1 GALLERY 202 A12.1 A1 UP A19 STAIR 2S1 A13 UP 202 2S2 STAIR 2S2 1' - 4" A21 A21 A21 7 1/2" A33 53 RECEPTION HALL 206 A1 A A7.2 CONERENCE ROOM / A ' /2" A1 A12 A ELEVATOR LOBBY OUTDOOR SEATING ' - 3 1/2" 17' - 2" 8' - 5" A28 CC-1 C G 8" 18' - 11" 20' - 2" 3' - 6" 210A A1 A1 ELEVATOR 2E1 6' - 6" STORAGE A7.2 12' - 8 1/8" A11 A10 A31 A7 D CATERING STAGING MECH/ELEC 209 8' - 0" A1 7' - 6" 3' - 5" A34 C A1 C D 2' - 0" D CJ CJ CJ CJ 1' - 0" CJ 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 22' - 0" 14' - 8" 7' - 8" CC-1 UP 53 A7.1 70' - 4" 51 A7.2 A8.2 ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM A5.1 A1.2 LOOR PLAN, UPPER LEVEL /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION CJ 22' - 0" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 20' - 8" 25 A A7.1 29' - 0" 11' - 0" 18' - 0" D E G 41 C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :40:24 AM NORTH LOOR PLAN - UPPER LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A5.1 Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

117 7 LEGEND NOTES EXISTING GALV STANDING SEAM ROO A A.1 C ROO PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 4" 2" 12 ROO CHANGE A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" WRAP MEMBRANE UNDER EXISTING ROO EXTENDED SS LASHING 24" X 24" X 2" THICK SPASH BLOCK ULL LENGTH O ROO CHANGE ROO ASSEMBLY R2 " PLUG AND SEAL END O PIPE CONDUIT 2" GALV PIPE CONDUIT OR COMM/CABLE ROUTING A 3" 1' - 6" STUD WALL 2-14 GA STUDS - TYP BENT PL 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 3" x 9 1/4" 5'-0" OC MAX W/ 2 - #12 SCREWS PER BRACKET - TYP R5 55 A7.1 1/4" / 12" 26 A7.1 R2 54 A7.1 1/4" / 12" R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 A. ROO PLAN NOTES APPLY TO ALL ROO PLAN SHEETS. B. ALL INSULATION IS TAPERED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TAPER IN INSULATION. SHADED AREAS INDICATE CRICKETS AROUND DRAINS. TAPERED INSULATION SHALL PROVIDE A MINIMUM O 1/4-INCH PER OOT O SLOPE TO ROO DRAINS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. C. ALL ROO CURBS TO BE A MINIMUM O 8" ABOVE ROOING LEVELS. PROVIDE TAPERED INSULATION ROO SADDLES AT ROO CURBS TO PROVIDE APPROPRIATE DRAINAGE. D. SEE STRUCTURAL OR RAMING AROUND ROO PENETRATIONS. E. COORDINATE THE SIZE AND LOCATION O ROO PENETRATIONS OR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. REER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS OR PENETRATIONS NOT SHOWN ON THIS SHEET.. LASH DRAINS, CURBS, VENTS AND STACKS PER MANUACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS I DETAIL NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. KEYNOTE LEGEND EXISTING STANDING SEAM METAL ROO; EVALUATE OR ROO LEAK LOCATIONS AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED. ROO DRAIN AND OVERLOW; SEE MECHANICAL MECHANICAL UNIT; SEE MECHANICAL BALLASTED ROO MOUNT GUARDRAIL; MANUACTURER: PEAK ALL PROTECTION, MODEL: BRM-GR 4000 OR APPROVED EQUAL ABRIC AWNING BELOW ROO HATCH W/ WALL MOUNTED ACCESS LADDER EXISTING WOOD STAIR 24"X24"X2" CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE ROO ACCESS HATCH BASE LASHING 7" VARIES 4" 2" LAP SEALANT TOP O PARAPET BEYOND SS CLAMPING RING PRE-MOLDED PIPE BOOT LAP SEALANT ROO MEMBRANE 8". X 1'-0" OC VARIES BENT PLATE BRACKETS - SEE PLAN DETAIL 3/4" DIA x 1'-6" STEEL BAR 1'-0" OC R1 34 A11.2 R2 51 A7.2 CONT. SEALANT OPENING DIMENSION 21 ROO HATCH SECTION A4.1 A4.1 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" 4" MIN 1'-0" MIN 1'-0" MIN 1'-0" MIN 1/4" STEEL TRIM ANGLE - CONT. AROUND OPENING ROO ASSEMBLY 31 CONDENSING UNIT PIPING PENETRATION DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" LINE O ROO SLOPE BEYOND ROO MEMBRANE COVER BOARD TAPERED INSULATION ROO INSULATION 1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING VAPOR BARRIER T&G DECKING - SEE STRUCTURAL 12" 1/4" ROO ACCESS LADDER, NOT SHOWN 4" MIN SHEET METAL CAP CONDENSING UNIT PIPING CONT SEALANT AROUND PIPE PENETRATION SHEET METAL SCREWS AT EACH SIDE SHEET METAL COVERED CURB ROOING MEMBRANE W/ TERMINATION BAR AND SEALANT PERIMETER CANTS C L O VALLEY 1'-2" TYPICAL 12" CMU +0" 2" 22 COMM/CABLE PENETRATION A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" LINE O SHEET METAL, EXTEND UNDER ROO MEMBRANE C O ROO DRAIN L 24" x 24" SUMP RECEIVER CLOSURE DETAIL 1'-6" +3/4" 1/4" L 3" x 3" x 1/4" RAME UNDER DECK CLAMP PIPE INSULATION T&G DECK - SEE STRUCTURAL WOOD JOIST - SEE STRUCTURAL PIPE CLAMP TOP AND BOTTOM; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL OR ALL CONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE CONDUIT; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL OR ALL CONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE 12" CENTERLINE O VALLEY 1' - 6" 2' - 0" 1' - 6" C CENTERLINE O VALLEY 1' - 2" 1' - 6" 1' - 0". SECTION 23 INTERIOR LADDER DETAIL A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1/4" / T SLOPE 1/4" / T SLOPE +3/4" +3/4" 1' - 6" 1' - 6" 2' - 0" 1' - 6" 1/4" / T SLOPE +3/4" +3/4" +0" +0" 41 A4.1 +0" +0" 1/4" / T SLOPE 41 A4.1 ROO DRAIN LAYOUT AT SLOPED DECK WITH TAPERED INSULATION ROO DRAIN LAYOUT AT SLOPED DECK WITH TAPERED INSULATION L 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 3/8" x 2" W/ 1/2" Ø x 4" EXP BOLTS OVERLOW DRAIN BY MECH 24" x 24" SUMP RECEIVER BY MECH TAPERED INSULATION ROO DRAIN BY MECH 24" x 24" SUMP RECEIVER BY MECH TAPERED INSULATION OVERLOW DRAIN BY MECH ROO DRAIN BY MECH NORTH ROO PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 51 A A7.2 R8 5' - 0" 52 A7.1 D 26 A A7.2 R3 CC-1 2' - 8" R2 1/4" / 12" 1/4" / 12" 5' - 0" R3 R2 R3 R6 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 10' - 0" E G 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 5' - 0" UP 53 A7.1 R4 R7 A4.1 ROO PLAN AND DETAILS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :40:26 AM 41 ROO DRAIN DETAIL A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 8" 51 CONDUIT PENETRATION DETAIL A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" GALV PIPE CONDUIT - SEE ELECTRICAL LAP SEALANT SS CLAMPING RING PRE-MOLDED PIPE BOOT LAP SEALANT ROO MEMBRANE T&G DECK - SEE STRUCTURAL WOOD JOIST - SEE STRUCTURAL PIPE CLAMP TOP AND BOTTOM; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL OR ALL CONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE CONDUIT; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL OR ALL CONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE C O STEEL BEAM, STEEL JOIST OR MASONRY BEARING WALL ROO STRUCTURE 52 ROO DRAIN DETAIL A4.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ROO DRAINS 43 ROO DRAIN / OVERLOW A4.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" PORCELAIN PLAZA PAVER ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL PLAZAMATE INSULATION ROO MEMBRANE COVER BOARD TAPERED INSULATION BASE INSULATION VAPOR BARRIER 1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING MINIMUM SPACE OR COMPENSATOR (1 5/8") AND ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL (2") COMPENSATOR 3 5/8" HIGH POINT O SLOPE WHER OCCURS 3 5/8" 1 1/2" 3/4" 1 1/2" VARIES 1/2" A4.1 8" 1 1/2" MIN VARIES 1/2" SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 1/2" 54 PLAZA DECK DETAIL WALL; SEE PLAN TERMINATION BAR WITH SEALANT 12" 1/4" 3 5/8" 3/4" PORCELAIN PLAZA DECK PAVER PLAZA DECK 113' - 41/4" MIN SPACE OR COMPENSATOR (1-5/8") AND ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL (2") ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL 1 1/2" PLAZAMATE INSULATION SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE COVER BOARD TAPERED POLYISO INSULATION (LAT 1/2" O INSUL+ TAPER) TOP O JOIST 111' - 7" 2" BASE LAYER INSULATION VAPOR BARRIER 1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING T&G DECKING 1' - 9 1/4" Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

118 TOP COURSE SMOOTH ACE CMU CC-1 PREINISHED METAL COPING AND ANCHOR CLIPS (2) LAYERS O CONT. 3/4" EXT GRADE PLYWOOD 3/8"Ø x 6" LONG GALV ANCHOR 24" O.C. 6 PREINISHED METAL COPING AND ANCHOR CLIPS (2) LAYERS O CONT. 3/4" EXT GRADE PLYWOOD 3/8"Ø x 6" LONG GALV ANCHOR 24" O.C. CMU 6 6" 4 1/2" T.O. MASONRY 126' - 8" 6" 4 1/2" T.O. MASONRY 126' - 8" LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER CAVITY INSULATION 8" CMU LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 4" CMU VENEER 2" RIGID INSULATION CAVITY WALL INSULATION 1/2" EXT PLYWOOD EPDM MEMBRANE ROOING; EXTEND OVER TOP O PARAPET TO 2" PAST THE TOP O THE ACE CMU VENEER COVER BOARD TAPERED INSULATION 1/2" PLYWOOD VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVER CMU WALL AND LAP OVER AIR BARRIER 4" MIN ROO LEVEL 124' - 5" T&G DECKING WOOD JOISTS; SEE STRUCTURAL HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. HORIZ VENEER JOINT 16" O.C. 8" CMU LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER ACE BRICK 2" RIGID INSULATION CAVITY WALL INSULATION 1/2" EXT PLYWOOD EPDM MEMBRANE ROOING; EXTEND OVER TOP O PARAPET TO 2" PAST THE TOP O THE ACE CMU VENEER COVER BOARD TAPERED INSULATION 1/2" PLYWOOD VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVER CMU WALL AND LAP OVER AIR BARRIER 4" MIN ROO LEVEL 124' - 5" T&G DECKING WOOD JOISTS; SEE STRUCTURAL HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. 7 TILE AS SCHEDULED GENIEMAT RST05 5MM SOUND CONTROL UNDERLAYMENT; INSTALL PER MANUACTURER INSTRUCTIONS 1/2" PLYWOOD LEVEL ' - 3 1/2" T&G WOOD DECKING 113' - 4 1/4" TRANSISTION STRIP EMBEDDED LASHING AND WEEPS 24" O.C. CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL ACE BRICK PORCELAIN ROO PAVER SYSTEM SS DRIP EDGE COUNTERLASHING; WRAP UNDER STEEL ANGLE VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVER INSULATION AND TIE INTO AIR BARRIER ROOING MEMBRANE W/ TERMINATION BAR AND SEALANT 1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING LEVEL ' - 3 1/2" 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE RIGID INSULATION 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 1' - 4" 7 5/8" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 1' - 4" 7 5/8" STEEL BEAM; SEE STRUCTURAL EXISTING WOOD LOOR STRUCTURE EXISTING MASONRY WALL 8" ACE O INSULATION 1' - 3" 21 PARAPET DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 22 PARAPET DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 24 NEW TO EXIST LOOR A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 25 DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 1' - 4" 2" 7 5/8" 1' - 4" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8" SEE PLAN 31 DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" HORIZ VENEER JOINT 16" O.C. UNO CMU VENEER AIR SPACE CAVITY WALL INSULATION LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER TRANSITION STRIP CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERAIL HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. UNO EMBEDDED LASHING AND 24" O.C. SS DRIP EDGE GROUT SOLID 1' - 4" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8" SEE PLAN GWB METAL STUD RAMING; SEE PLAN OR WALL TYPE CONT. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT PERIMETER TILE LOORING AND WALL BASE AS SCHEDULED GENIEMAT RST05 5MM SOUND CONTROL UNDERLAYMENT; INSTALL PER MANUACTURER INSTRUCTIONS LEVEL ' - 3 1/2" OWENS CORNING 2" MAT ACED SOUND SELECTED BOARD ASTENED BETWEEN JOISTS. 1/2" PLYWOOD T&G WOOD DECKING WOOD JOISTS; SEE STRUCTURAL WHERE METAL STUDS INTERACE WITH CMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP WALL URRING; SEE PLAN HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. UNO HORIZ VENEER JOINT 16" O.C. UNO 8" CMU LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER CAVITY WALL INSULATION 4" CMU VENEER WHERE MTL STUDS INTERACE WITH CMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP GWB MTL STD RAMING; SEE PLAN OR WALL TYPE ISOLATION JOINT LOOR INISH AND WALL BASE AS SCHEDULED CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE; SEE STRUCTURAL VAPOR BARRIER LEVEL ' - 0" NEW GALV SHEET METAL COPING NEW BLOCKING AS REQ'D EXISTING MASONRY WALL EXISTING STANDING SEAM METAL ROO COMPRESSIBLE SEAL BOND BEAM 32 DETAIL A7.3 HORIZ VENEER JOINT 16" O.C. UNO CMU VENEER AIR SPACE CAVITY WALL INSULATION LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER TRANSITION STRIP CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERAIL HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. UNO EMBEDDED LASHING AND 24" O.C. SS DRIP EDGE GROUT SOLID SEALANT SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" GALV COUNTER LASHING 2" 1' - 3 5/8" HORIZ. JOINT 16" O.C. EXISTING MASONRY WALL DOUBLE WYTHE 8" CMU WALL WHERE METAL STUDS INTERACE WITH CMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP MTL STD RAMING; SEE PLAN OR WALL TYPE GWB ISOLATION JOINT LOOR INISH AND WALL BASE AS SCHEDULED CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE; SEE STRUCTURAL VAPOR BARRIER LEVEL ' - 0" 1' - 4" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8" 33 SOIT DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ALUM CLAD WOOD WINDOW LIMESTONE SILL SS DRIP EDGE STONE VENEER CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL CAVITY WALL INSULATION LASHING AND WEEPS 24" O.C. SS LASHING WRAP INTO WINDOW GROUT SOLID LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER SLAB ON GRADE; SEE CIVIL ISOLATION JOINT SEALANT AT PERIMETER CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL 4" CMU VENEER STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE CAVITY WALL INSULATION LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER EMBEDDED LASHING AND 24" OC BOTTOM PLATE, SEE STR, PAINT TO MATCH WINDOW RAME STEEL LINTEL - SEE STRUCTURAL 3 5/8" METAL STUD RAMING SHEATHING LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION EXT GYPSUM BOARD SOIT; PAINT 1/2" 6" WOOD SILL AND TRIM; PAINT GWB 1-5/8" MTL STUD URRING SOLID CMU CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE; SEE STRUCTURAL LOOR INISH AS SCHEDULED LEVEL ' - 0" VAPOR BARRIER 8" CMU 3-5/8" METAL STUD RAMING SHEATHING LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 2-1/2" RIGID INSULATION 5/8" EXT GWB SOIT, PAINT SEALANT AT PERIMETER 4" CMU VENEER CAVITY WALL INSULATION 34 SOIT DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" HORIZ VENEER JOINT 16" O.C. UNO CMU VENEER AIR SPACE CAVITY WALL INSULATION LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER TRANSITION STRIP CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERAIL HORIZ JOINT 16" O.C. UNO EMBEDDED LASHING AND 24" O.C. SS DRIP EDGE GROUT SOLID 1' - 4" 3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8" SEE PLAN WHERE METAL STUDS INTERACE WITH CMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP GWB MTL STD RAMING ISOLATION JOINT LOOR INISH AND WALL BASE AS SCHEDULED CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE; SEE STRUCTURAL VAPOR BARRIER LEVEL ' - 0" ALUM CLAD WOOD WINDOW LIMESTONE SILL SS DRIP EDGE STONE VENEER CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL LASHING AND 24" O.C. CC-1 SS LASHING WRAP INTO WINDOW GROUT SOLID 2-1/2" RIGID INSULATION AIR BARRIER SLAB ON GRADE; SEE CIVIL ISOLATION JOINT 1/2" WOOD SILL; PAINT GWB MTL STD RAMING SHEATHING WOOD LOOR RAMING; SEE STRUCTURAL 1/2" PLYWOOD LOOR INISH AS SCHEDULED LEVEL ' - 0" A7.3 WALL SECTION DETAILS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION 2 1/2" PEREMETER INSLUTION TO BOTTOM O OOTING 3 5/8" 1 3/4" 2" 7 5/8" 2 1/4" 3 5/8" 1 1/4" 2 1/2" 5/8" 8" 5/8" C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :40:27 AM 2 1/2" PERIMETER INSULATION TO BOTTOM O OOTING CONCRETE OUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL 51 BASE DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 52 BASE DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 1/2" PERIMETER INSULATION TO BOTTOM O OOTING CONCRETE OUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL 2" RIGID INSULATION EXISTING RUBBLE OUNDATION WALL CONCRETE OUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL 54 BASE DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 1/2" PERIMETER INSULATION TO BOTTOM O OOTING CONCRETE OUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL 55 BASE DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" EXISTING WOOD RAMED LOOR EXISTING RUBBLE/CONCRETE OUNDATION WALL; IELD VERIY 56 BASE DETAIL A7.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

119 1 2 ALIGN DOOR AND RAME WHERE OCCURS CARPET METAL EDGE STRIP ULL GROUT JOINT THIN SET TILE ALIGN CT ON BUILT UP THINSET MORTAR METAL TRIM PT (THIN SET) ULL GROUT JOINT SUBLOOR 1/4" MAX ALIGN DOOR AND RAME WHERE OCCURS METAL EDGE STRIP ULL GROUT JOINT THIN SET TILE PT THI SET MORTAR 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS SEL-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT METAL LATH EXISTING PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT DOOR AND RAME WHERE OCCURS CONTROL JOINT ULL GROUT JOINT THIN SET MORTAR PT CONCRETE SUBLOOR EXISTING JOISTS 16" OC SEE RCP 6" SEE RCP 3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUD 32" O.C. 3 5/8" x 20GA METAL 16" O.C. 5/8" GWB SUSP APC INISH CEILING AS SCHEDULED SEE 6" RCP SEE RCP 3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUD 32" O.C. 3 5/8" x 20GA METAL 16" O.C. 5/8" GWB SUSP APC INISH CEILING AS SCHEDULED 11 TRANSITION CARPET TO PORCELAIN TILE A10.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 12 TRANSITION - CERAMIC TILE TO PORCELAIN TILE A10.1 SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 13 TRANSITION - CONCRETE TO PORCELAIN TILE A10.1 SCALE: 12" = 1'-0" 14 TRANSITION - CONCRETE TO WOOD SUBLOOR A10.1 SCALE: 12" = 1'-0" 15 GWB BULKHEAD A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 16 GWB BULKHEAD A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE " 1/2" 5" A B 4" 8" CL 4" TOILET SIGN RECLAIMED WOOD, STAINED ST-1 SYMBOL COLOR: BLACK INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL O ACCESSIBILITY ROOM TEXT, 1" HIGH ONT: ARIAL, TYP COLOR: BLACK, TYP BRAILLE - GRADE II, 24 POINT COLOR: BLACK TYPE A (SHOWN) - WOMEN TYPE B - MEN 8" H 8" STAIR SIGN 3" GRAPHIC COLOR: BLACK ALUMINUM TEXT, 1" HIGH ONT: ARIAL, TYP COLOR: BLACK, TYP WOMEN STAIRS BRAILLE - GRADE II, 24 POINT COLOR: BLACK 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 2" 3/4" 2" 1 1/4" 1" 2" 1 1/4" 2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 2" 1" NOTICE OCCUPANCY IS LIMITED TO 1 1/2" 1' - 6" OR YOUR SAETY ### 1 1/2" PERSONS BY ORDER O THE CODE OICIAL Keep Posted Under Penalty Of Law 2' - 0" ONT: HELVETICA MEDIUM, TYP COLOR: BLACK RECLAIMED WOOD, STAINED ST-1 OCCUPANT LOAD PER IBC OCCUPANT LOAD REQUIREMNETS NOTE: SIGN REQUIRED AT ANY SPACE WHERE REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION CC-1 VERIY A 2" 2" INSULATED DOOR SWEEP GASKET KEG COOLER DOOR SILL 14 GA SS THRESHOLD PLATE SCREWED & SEALED TO LOOR TILE & MORTAR SETTING BED CC-1 INSULATED LOOR PLANEL MASONITE SPACERS BY OOD SERVICE EQUIP CONTR GROUT ILLER CC-1 21 TYPICAL PANEL SIGNS A10.1 WOOD JOIST ATTACH 2X MEMBER TO JOIST RUNNING PARALLEL WITH WALL A10.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 31 TOP O WALL DETAILS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 1' - 6" WHERE WALLS RUN PARALLEL WITH WOOD JOISTS 1' - 3" EXISTING MASONRY WALL TOOTH IN SALVAGED BRICK TO EXISTING MASONRY WALL GWB ON METAL STUD RAMING BRICK TIES STRUCTURAL COLUMN; SEE STRUCTURAL CMU BOTTOM O DECK OR LOOR 16 GA RECEIVER CHANNEL CONT W/ 2 1/2" MIN LEGS NO CONNECTION BETWEEN CHANNEL AND TRACK ASTEN GYPSUM BOARD 1" BELOW DELECTION TRACK 3/16" Ø x 1 1/4" SCREW LOORS, NO 8x18 2'-8" O.C. MAX STABILIZE STUDS AT TOP W/ CONT CHANNEL AND BRIDGE CLIP AT EACH STUD 1/2" WOOD JOIST WHERE WALLS RUN PERPENDICULAR WITH WOOD JOISTS INILL BETWEEN JOIST W/ (2) 2X MEMBERS TO CLOSE GAP RELIE JOINT BELOW LOOR STRUCTURE GROUT ULL BLDG ELT ONE SIDE 3/8" JOINT - RAKE BACK 3/4" W/ BACKER ROD AND SEALANT BOTH SIDES MESH - SEE STRUCTURAL GROUT ULL CMU 23 OCCUPANT LOAD SIGN A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" WHERE WALLS RUN PARLLEL WITH WOOD JOISTS AND ALLS BETWEEN JOISTS 3/16" Ø x 1 1/4" SCREW LOORS, NO 8x18 2'-8" O.C. MAX NO CONNECTION BETWEEN CHANNEL AND TRACK BOTTOM O DECK OR LOOR RELIE JOINT BELOW LOOR STRUCTURE 16 GA RECEIVER CHANNEL CONT W/ 2 1/2" MIN LEGS ASTEN GYPSUM BOARD 1" BELOW DELECTION TRACK WOOD JOIST STABILIZE STUDS AT TOP W/ CONT CHANNEL AND BRIDGE CLIP AT EACH STUD CMU CASING BEAD AND SEALANT - BOTH SIDES METAL STUD WALL - SEE PLAN OR TYPE A B EXISTING BRICK WALL PERIMETER SEALANT AT METAL PANEL LOCATIONS 1/2" X 3" PLATE W/ 1" DIA. HOLE 3" 1 1/2" OPTION A OPTION B 1 1/2" 1/4" WIRE ROPE ESTOON LIGHTING SUPPORT 3" X 7" X 1/4" STEEL PLATE 7" 1/2" 2-3/8" DIA. HILTI HY-70 ADHESIVE THREADED ANCHORS W/ 10" MIN EMBED ø 1" 34 ESTOON LIGHTING ANCHOR A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOTES: 1. SEE STRUCTURAL OR REINORCING REQUIREMENTS. 2. EITHER OPTION "A" OR OPTION "B" MAY BE USED AT INTERIOR CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS. 1" 3" BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - TYP BOTH SIDES PRE-ORMED CONTROL JOINT GASKET STOP HORIZ JOINT REIN AT EACH SIDE O CONTROL JOINT SASH BLOCK 3/8" JOINT - RAKE BACK 3/4" W/ BACKER ROD AND SEALANT BOTH SIDES BLDG ELT ONE SIDE GROUT ULL CMU EXISTING CONCRETE CEILING INSULATED PANELS 3/4" PLYWOOD MIN - CONTRACTOR OPTION: ADD PLYWOOD OR ADJUST THICKNESS PLYWOOD THICKNESS AS REQUIRED TO MEET REQUIRED INISH LOOR ELEVATION; SEE INISH SCHEDULE OR LOOR INISH NEW 2X WOOD LOOR RAMING EXISTING WOOD LOOR RAMING VERIY WITH OOD SERVICE EQUIP CONTR 35 WALK-IN COOLER/REEZER DETAILS A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2" 2" GWB - SEE WALL TYPES ON PLANS OR NUMBER O LAYERS METAL STUDS - SEE WALL TYPES ON PLANS OR SIZE AND GAUGE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AROUND PERIMETER O ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES SEAL ALL ELECTRICAL KNOCKOUTS NOTE: NO BACK-TO-BACK DEVICES BASE AS SCHEDULED CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT UNDER OUTER LAYER O GWB ON EACH SIDE KEG COOLER VERIY WITH OOD SERVICE EQUIP CONTR 4" 2" VERIY 6 1/2" 6 1/2" 2 1/2" 4" RO 2 1/2" 4" RO KEG COOLER 6" 1' - 1" AT GWB WALL 6" VERIY WITH OOD SERVICE EQUIP CONTR 10 1/2" RO 10 1/2" RO 1' - 1" AT CMU WALL 2" 2" LINE OEXISTING WALL INSULATED WALL PANEL BY OOD SERVICE CONTRACTOR CC-1 TILE & MORTAR SETTING BED RECESSED COOLER LOOR PANEL BY OOD SERVICE CONTRACTOR ISOLATION JOINT 1/2" RIGID INSULATION 2X6 BREAKERS TREATED WOOD CONT AROUND REEZER URNISHED & INSTALLED BY GEN CONTR 2X6 SLEEPER UNDER 1/2" PLYWOOD. SHIM AS REQUIRED TO MEET INISHED LOOR LEVEL O KITCHEN EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB GWB/METAL STUD WALL - SEE PLANS OR WALL TYPE TO MAINTAIN A 1-HOUR RATING BEHIND EC'S AT AN 8" CMU WALL, EITHER PROVIDE A 4" SOLID BLOCK OR AN 8" CUT CMU W/ 2" SOAPS AND ALL VOIDS GROUTED SOLID NOTE: VERIY ROUGH OPENING DIMENSION WITH CABINET MR - TOP O 4'-8" A A10.1 GENERAL DETAILS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions AND ADDITION CC-1 03/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 41 BRICK CORNER DETAIL A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 42 TYP CMU INTERSECTION A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 43 TYPICAL WALL INTERSECTION A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 44 TYP CMU CONTROL JOINT (CJ) A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 45 SOUND WALL DETAIL A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 46 EC DETAILS A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" CC-1 CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS TOP TRACK C:\Revit\ _AR_2016_rhauptmanVCNNG.rvt 3/30/ :49:35 AM BAS WABO WEATHER SEALL II OR EQUAL BACKER ROD AND SEALANT CMU VENEER 2" RIDID INSULATION LUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER CONTROL JOINT CMU 51 NEW TO EXISTING BUILDING JOINT A10.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2" A A B A10.1 CRIPPLE STUDS ABOVE HEADER TOP TRACK - SEE NOTE BELOW HEADER STIENER STUDS BEARING STUD BOTTOM TRACK NOTE: ABOVE HEADER, PROVIDE 1/2" MIN CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN CRIPPLE STUDS AND STIENER STUDS BOTH SIDES O ALL DOOR OPENINGS TYP METAL STUD RAMING AT DOOR OPENING 52 GWB CONTROL DOOR RAMES SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" B TYP GWB CONTROL JOINT ABOVE GWB/METAL STUD WALL - SEE PLAN OR WALL TYPE DOOR RAME BELOW CONTROL JOINT CRIPPLE 16" OC STIENER STUDS - SEE STRUCTURAL NOTE: AT DOUBLE LAYER GWB LOCATIONS MAINTAIN 1/2" CLEAR SPACE AT IRST LAYER AND CONTROL JOINT AT SECOND LAYER A10.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 1/2" JOINT WIDTH 54 CONTROL JOINT - SHAT WALL SEALANT 1" GYPSUM LINER PANELS MINERAL WOOL INSULATION STEEL J-RUNNER GWB CONTROL JOINT A10.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 1/2" MAX. 7/8" 55 CONTROL JOINT - 1HR WALL MINERAL WOOL INSULATION COMPRESSED TO ILL OPENING TYPE X GWB (TYP) A10.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 1/2" MAX. SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION 7/8" 56 CONTROL JOINT - SOUND WALL GWB ACOUSTICAL SEALANT, BOTH SIDES CONTROL JOINT ASSEMBLY, BOTH SIDES Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

120 VD VD VD VD VD VD VD LEGEND NOTES LEGEND NOTES ARE COMMON TO ALL SOME NOTES MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS SHEET ATU-001 8" SA UP 8"x12" LTD UP 8"x14" OPENING IN TOP O DUCT S 12"x8" SA 8"ø SA VD VD 8"x8" SA 8"x8" SA R-1 8" x 6" 175 CM STORAGE 001 R-1 8" x 6" 175 CM STAIR 0S1 UP STORAGE 002 8"x8" LTD UP 12"x8" SA R-1 8" x 6" 135 CM ATU-002 6"ø SA UP S STAIR 0S "x8" LTD DN 8"X12" OPENING IN TOP O DUCT 8" SA DN S 8"x8" SA WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 YOUNG REGULATOR 8"x8" EA UP 8"ø SA MEN'S RESTROOM 107 D-4 6" ø 100 CM 10"ø SA 14"ø SA S 6"ø SA D-4 6" ø 100 CM G-3 8" x 8" TYP 2 6"ø SA 8"x8" EA CC-1 R-1 8" x 6" 150 CM TYP 5 8"ø EA S DN 6"ø SA STAIR 1S2 A TR-101 G-3 8" x 8" S S G-3 8" x 8" 150 CM A.1 UP LOUNGE 105 CC-1 ATU-102 G-3 8" x 8" 150 CM 12"ø SA 8"x8" LTD CORRIDOR 108 TR-102 STAIR 1S3 26"x16" OPENING IN TOP O DUCT 16"x14" SA UP S T T STORAGE 104 STORAGE 103 STAIR 1S1 S S A.5 B CUH-101 VESTIBULE "ø SA VD VD VD VD VD VD TASTING ROOM S RECEPTION HALL 109 RETAIL "/10" SA VD VD VD R-1 10" x 6" 210 CM R-1 10" x 6" 210 CM A/V 111 MEN'S RESTROOM "/12" SA 30"/18" RA 14"/10" SA VD VD VD R-1 R-1 R-1 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 210 CM 210 CM 205 CM R-1 R-1 R-1 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 210 CM 210 CM 205 CM VD VD VD S C O2 14"/10" SA CO BAR 119 D-4 6" ø 45 CM E-2 C O2 S 6"ø EA O2 C 10"ø SA S S 18"/12" SA ATU-105 S 18"/12" SA G-4 SURACE MOUNTED TO BOTTOM O DUCT (TYPICAL) 18"/12" SA R-1 R-1 R-1 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 10" x 6" 210 CM 210 CM 205 CM VD VD VD 14"/10" SA TO SSIU-2 20"/14" LTD TO CUH-102 CUH "ø SA R-1 8" x 6" 150 CM TYP 2 R-1 8" x 6" 200 CM TYP 2 R-1 8" x 6" 150 CM TYP 2 R-1 8" x 6" 150 CM TYP 2 R-1 10" x 6" 205 CM 18"/12" SA 18"/12" SA 8"x8" SA 36"/18" RA ATU "ø SA VD ATU-107 8"ø SA O2 VD S C PRIVATE TASTING 123 G-2 S C 12" x 6" O2 8"x8" LTD D-1 10"x10" SA 8" ø 190 CM 8"ø SA 12"x6" LTD TYP 2 VD ELEVATOR 1E1 G-1 G-2 24" x 12" 12" x 12" ATU-104 VD 6"ø SA OOD PREP 120 S 36"x18" RA 28"x12" SA E-3 KEG COOLER "x12" SA 32"x14" SA S C STORAGE 117 ATU-106 STAIR 1S4 D-1 8" ø 130 CM UP CATERING STAGING 116 ATU-103 CONERENCE ROOM 115 6"ø EA 6"ø SA DN 16"/10" SA 16"/10" SA 18"x12" SA 8"ø EA 8"x6" LTD MECH/ELEC/CUST 121 R-1 G-1 6"x10" OPENING 8" x 6" 24" x 12" IN TOP O DUCT 150 CM OICE 60 CM TYP VD VD ATU "ø SA REGISTER TO DISCHARGE PARALLEL TO LOOR (TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) R-1 8" x 6" 150 CM CC-1 G-4 24" x 24" TYP 4 3/4" CD UP 10"ø SA 8"x8" LTD DN G-2 24" x 14" MOUNT BOTTOM O GRILLE AT 9'-2" A 24"x14" LTD G-4 SURACE MOUNTED TO BOTTOM O DUCT (TYPICAL) CC-1 CC-1 W/ VD ANGLED 45 DN. TOWARDS GLASS 3/4" CD 8"ø SA 3/4" CD DN TO MS G-4 24" x 24" TYP 2 G-1 24" x 12" 8"x6" LTD 12"x8" SA G-2 24" x 12" 12"x10" SA R-1 10" x 6" 105 CM TYP 2 12"x12" LTD 6"ø SA 200 CM D-4 6" ø 45 CM W/ VD ANGLED 45 DN. TOWARDS GLASS 50 CM 3/4" CD UP 8"x6" LTD OSET UNDER BEAM 36"x12" SA D-1 8" ø 140 CM 16"x12" SA TEMP CONTROL PANEL MECH/ELEC 114 CC-1 OSET UP 3/4" CD DN TO MS 22"x20" SA UP 36"x18" RA UP KEY VALUE KEYNOTE LEGEND - HVAC KEYNOTE TEXT 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE HVAC PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN LEVELS M /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. M1.1-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION HOODED WALL CAP 1 M3.1 CORRIDOR 110 HOODED WALL CAP WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :12:34 AM NORTH HVAC PLAN, BASEMENT LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH HVAC PLAN, MAIN LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D E G Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

121 LEGEND NOTES MECHANICAL NOTES (MECHANICAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL MECHANICAL DRAWINGS) A. TEXT. A A.1 A.5 B C A A.1 C 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE UP D-6 8" ø 220 CM D-6 8" ø 220 CM STAIRUP 2S3 MOUNT BOTTOM O PLENUM BOX AT 10'-3" (TYP 2) CC WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 VD D-2 6" ø 100 CM 8"x8" LTD MEN'S RESTROOM 204 YOUNG REGULATOR 8"x8" EA DN 12"ø EA DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL 12"ø EA UP TO E-1 D-5 8" ø 185 CM D-5 8" ø 185 CM D-4 6" ø 100 CM BAR 201 G-5 24" x 12" 150 CM 12"x10" EA ATU-201 G-5 24" x 12" G-3 8" x 8" VD 8"ø EA G-3 8" x 8" 150 CM 8"ø EA M S C O2 14"ø SA VD R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM G-3 24" x 24" TYP 2 S 20"x14" LTD S G-1 24" x 12" TYP 2 CORRIDOR 205 G-1 24" x 24" 22"x10" SA R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM VD GALLERY 202 STAIR 2S1 UP VD RECEPTION HALL 206 VD VD VD R-1 12" x 6" 250 CM REGISTER TO DISCHARGE PARALLEL TO LOOR (TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM STAIR 2S2 ELEVATOR LOBBY "/10" SA 14"/10" SA R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM O2 C VD R-1 12" x 6" 250 CM 14"/10" SA 14"/10" SA VD OUTDOOR SEATING 213 D-5 8" ø 150 CM TYP 2 RS/RL UP 10"/8" SA 10"x8" SA R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM R-1 R-1 R-1 12" x 6" 12" x 6" 12" x 6" 250 CM 250 CM 250 CM G-2 VD VD VD 16" x 8" S C O2 14"/10" SA RS/RL UP TR-201 D-5 8" ø 200 CM TR-202 CO SSIU-2 D-5 8" ø 200 CM CC-1 16"x8" LTD R-1 12" x 6" 200 CM CONERENCE S ROOM 207 3/4" CD DN G-1 24" x 12" D-1 8" ø 8"ø SA 290 CM 36"x18" RA UP TO RTU-1 20"/12" SA 34"/14" RA 20"/12" SA VD R-1 12" x 6" 250 CM 34"x16" RA UP TO RTU-2 G-4 18" x 12" TYP 7 20"/12" SA 26"x14" SA UP TO RTU-2 34"/14" RA 10"x8" SA G-2 8" x 6" C O2 S 20"/12" SA 10"x8" SA 8"x6" LTD 6"ø SA G-2 12" x 6" S ATU-202 ATU-203 S T 12"x12" SA ATU-205 SSIU-1 VD 8"x6" LTD MECH/ELEC 209 ATU "x16" SA 36"x18" RA R-1 6" x 6" 90 CM 12"x6" LTD 6"ø SA 6"ø SA 10"x8" SA 12"x12" SA 26"x14" SA 6"ø SA ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211 3/4" CD DN G-1 24" x 12" CATERING STAGING 210 D-2 8" ø 210 CM R-1 6" x 6" 110 CM UP 28"x16" SA UP TO RTU-1 22"x20" SA DN 36"x18" RA DN E-1 10'-0" MIN 9 SSOU-2 M4.1 8 RS/RL DN M4.1 10'-0" MIN 9 RS/RL DN M4.1 8 SSOU-1 M RTU-2 M RTU-1 M4.1 10'-0" MIN 10'-0" MIN UP GUARDRAIL SEE ARCH. GUARDRAIL SEE ARCH. KEY VALUE KEYNOTE LEGEND - HVAC KEYNOTE TEXT HVAC PLAN, UPPER & ROO LEVELS M /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. M1.2-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION 1 M3.1 STORAGE 208 GUARDRAIL SEE ARCH. 1 M3.1 C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :12:41 AM NORTH HVAC PLAN, UPPER LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D E G NORTH HVAC PLAN, ROO LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D E G Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

122 3/30/ :12:53 AM PROJECT: GLACIAL TILL WINE TASTING ROOM PROJECT #: IRM: DLR GROUP, INC., OMAHA, NE ENGINEER: TODD J McDEVITT PHONE: GAS METER - GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (DWH-1) 1 CC /4 2 ROOTOP UNIT (RTU-1) /4 2 ROOTOP UNIT (RTU-2) /4 2 GAS IRE PITS (UTURE-NIC) /2 - TOTAL CONNECTED GAS LOAD 1,470 1 NOTES: 1. SET DISCHARGE O MAIN GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR AT BUILDING ENTRANCE AT 2 PSIG. 2. SERVED ROM 2 PSI SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2 PSI TO INCHES REGULATOR. SUMP PUMP SCHEDULE EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE MARK SERVES TEMP RANGE VOLUME PRESSURE PRESSURE VOLUME VOLUME WEIGHT BASIS O DESIGN MECH (ET-X) ( ) (GAL) (PSI) (PSI) (GAL) (MIN) (GAL) (MIN) (LBS) NOTES ET-1 DWH AMTROL ST-12C 1,2 MECHANICAL NOTES: OPERATING SYSTEM MAX. ALLOWABLE LINE TANK ACCEPTANCE 1. TANK SHALL COMPLY WITH LOW LEAD PLUMBING LAW. 2. ASME CODE COMPLIANT PRESSURE VESSEL. PUMP SCHEDULE MECHANICAL NOTES: MECHANICAL NOTES: MARK QUANTITY INPUT INPUT PRESS. CONN. NOTES MARK SERVES PUMP TYPE GPM 3. PUMP SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 3/4" SWEAT CONNECTIONS. 1. PROVIDE OUTDOOR AIRLOW MEASURING STATION, UNIT CONTROLLER TO MAINTAIN MINIMUM OUTDOOR AIRLOW INDEPENDENT O SUPPLY AN SPEED. 2. PROVIDE WITH COMPARATIVE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZER AND POWER EXHAUST. 3. LEAD COMPRESSOR IS A DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR WITH MODULATOION ROM 20%-100% O CAPACITY. 4. PROVIDE WITH THROUGH THE BASE GAS PIPING AND ELECTRICAL. 5. PROVIDE UNIT WITH STAINLESS STEEL HEAT EXCHANGER. 6. PROVIDE UNIT WITH DOUBLE WALL CONSTRUCTION. 7. PROVIDE WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WITH AN SCCR RATING O 24KA. 8. POWERED EXHAUST AN SPEED VARIED TO MAINATAIN BUILDING PRESSURE. 9. UNIT WEIGHT INCLUDES WEIGHT O ROO CURB. (MBH) EA (MBH) TOT. (IN.WG.) 10. PROVIDE WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WITH AN SCCR RATING O 20KA. HEAD E HP (T WG) 4. PUMP AND AQUASTAT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE (TMV-1). (%) (WATTS) 1. PUMP SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY AQUASTAT. CYCLE PUMP TO MAINTAIN A RECIRCULATING DHW TEMPERATURE O 110 DEG (ADJ.) AT PUMP. 2. PUMP SHALL BE BRONZE BODY CONSTRUCTION COMPLYING WITH LEAD-REE REQUIREMENT. SIZE (IN) PUMP MIN MOTOR DATA P DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC INLINE / TACO 006-B4 1,2,3,4 PACKAGED ROO TOP AIR-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP WITH INTEGRAL ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT SCHEDULE V PH HZ RPM 11. COIL EAT ACCOUNTS OR SOME RETURN AIR MIXED WITH WHEEL LAT (OUTSIDE AIR). DIERENCE BETWEEN SA CM AND OA CM IS RA CM. BACKLOW PREVENTER SCHEDULE MARK LOCATION APPLICATION CAPACITY DROP SIZE HEIGHT BASIS O DESIGN MECH DCBP-1 STORAGE 002 WATER SERVICE " ---- WATTS L007-NRS 1,2 DCBP-2 STORAGE 002 WATER SERVICE " ---- WATTS L007-NRS 1,2 PVB-1 AS SHOWN ON DWGS CLEANING CHEMICAL MIXING 5 5 1/2" 42" WATTS L800M4QT 3 MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. MOUNTING HEIGHT IS A MINIMUM O 12-INCHES TO THE BOTTOM O THE UNIT TO A MAXIMUM O 60-INCHES TO THE TOP O THE TEST PORTS. 2. PROVIDE WYE STRAINER. 3. PROVIDE ONE PVB OR EACH COLD AND HOT WATER HOSE BIBB. MARK SERVES LOCATION PUMP TYPE GPM HEAD E HP V PH HZ RPM MATERIAL DIA X DEPTH BASIS O DESIGN NOTES (SP-X) (EACH PUMP) (T WG) (%) (IN) SP-1 ELEVATOR PIT ELEVATOR 1 SIMPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP / ZOELLER MODEL N6292 1,2,3 SP STORAGE 001-STORAGE SIMPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP / MYERS MODEL ME40120T 1,2,3,4 SP STORAGE 002-STORAGE DUPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP / MYERS MODEL ME40120T 1,2,3,5 MECHANICAL NOTES (NO SPEC WAS WRITTEN OR THESE PUMPS. SUBMIT UNDER SPECTION ): 1. PROVIDE WITH SINGLE LEVEL PIGGYBACK VARIABLE LEVEL LOAT SWITCH, HARD WIRING THE PUMP LEAD WIRES TO THE LOAT SWITCH LEADS. NO OTHER EXTERNAL CONTROLS REQUIRED. 2. PUMP SHALL HAVE 2-INCH DISCHARGE, CHECK VALVE AND 25-OOT ELECTRICAL CORD WITH STANDARD GROUNDED PLUG. 3. THIS APPROVAL IS A GENERAL APPROVAL O THE MANUACTURER ONLY. INAL APPROVAL O THE PRODUCT IS CONTINGENT UPON THE SUBMITTAL O THE PRODUCT DATA AND/OR SHOP DRAWINGS, WHICH SHALL MEET THE SPECIIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS LISTED HERE. THE OLLOWING MANUACTURERS SHALL BE ADDED TO THE SPECIICATIONS OR THE PURPOSES O BIDDING AS INDICATED BELOW: A. BELL & GOSSETT B. LITTLE GIANT, RANKLIN ELECTRIC. C. LIBERTY PUMPS. D. MYERS, PENTAIR WATER E. WEIL PUMPS OOT CORD LENGTH, TETHERED MECHANICAL SWITCH TYPE LOATS, 14-INCHES "ON", 5-INCHES "O". 5. PROVIDE 36-INCH DIAMETER BY 60-INCH DEEP CAST IRON SUMP BASIN AND GAS TIGHT LID WITH 1-1/2-INCH DISCHARGE AND VENT CONNECTIONS, 20 OOT CORD LENGTH, TETHERED MECHANICAL SWITCH TYPE LOATS, 14-INCHES "ON", 5-INCHES "O", HIGH WATER ALARM LOAT SWITCH WITH 90 db (MIN) AUDIBLE ALARM, AND PUMP ALTERNATOR. PLUMBING IXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE IXTURE CONNECTIONS MECH MARK IXTURE CW HW WASTE VENT REMARKS NOTES L-1 LAVATORY, ADA COMPLIANT 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" UNDER COUNTER MOUNTING - MS-1 MOP SINK 1/2" 1/2" 3" SEE PLANS LOOR MOUNTED - RH-1 ROO HYDRANT 1" - 1/2" - ROO MOUNTED 1 UR-1 URINAL, WALL MOUNTED, LUSH VALVE 1" - 2" 1-1/2" 24-INCHES TO RIM - UR-2 URINAL, WALL MOUNTED, LUSH VALVE, ADA COMPLIANT 1" - 2" 1-1/2" 17-INCHES TO RIM - WC-1 WATER CLOSET, LOOR MOUNTED, LUSH VALVE 1" - 4" 2" 15-INCHES TO RIM; 161/4-INCHES TO TOP O SEAT - WC-2 WATER CLOSET, LOOR MOUNTED, LUSH VALVE, ADA COMPLIANT 1" - 4" 2" 161/2-INCHES TO RIM; 173/4-INCHES TO TOP O SEAT - WH-1 WALL HYDRANT 3/4" INCHES ABOVE INISH GRADE - MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. IXTURE URNISHED WITH 1/8" DRAIN HOLE AT BASE O UNIT. PROVIDE 1/2" COPPER DRAIN PIPE ROUTED TO NEAREST LOOR DRAIN, LOOR SINK, OR MOP SINK. BASIS O DESIGN MECH NOTES (GPM) (PSI) (INCHES) (A) NOTES WATER SOTENER SERVICE LOW RATES SOTENER BRINE ELECTRICAL... PEAK CONTINUOUS DESIGN TANK TANK MECH MARK LOCATION BASIS O DESIGN LOW RATE PRESS. DROP LOW RATE PRESS. DROP LOW RATE PRESS. DROP SIZE SIZE NOTES (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) (PSI) (DIA. X H.) (DIA. X H.) V PH HZ WS-1 MECH/ELEC " x 47", QTY = 2 24" x 40", QTY = CULLIGAN CTM 60-DUPLEX PROGRESSIVE LOW AQUA SENSOR 1,2 WATER SOTENER SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. BACKWASH LOW RATE IS 3.5 GPM WITH A MINIMUM 1-1/2" DRAIN PIPE SIZE AND A 2-INCH INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTION. 2. THE SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE 2.0 T³ O EXCHANGE RESIN PER VESSEL AND A TOTAL O 4.0 T³ O RESIN OR THE SYSTEM. DOMESTIC WATER HEATER - GAS IRED SCHEDULE EXPANSION MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. WATER HEATER SHALL INCLUDE AGA-RATED TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIE VALVE(S). 2. ELECTRICAL DATA ABOVE IS OR BLOWER MOTOR. 5. PROVIDE MANUACTURER'S CONDENSATE NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM. 8. PROVIDE OUTSIDE COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE ASSEMBLY WITH VENT CAP AND LUE CAP. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE SCHEDULE MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. MOUNTING HEIGHT IS A MAXIMUM O 60-INCHES TO THE TOP O THE OUTLET. 2. PRESSURE DROP IS VALVE ONLY PRESSURE DROP AT GPM LISTED. 3. MIXING VALVE STATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE OLLOWING: A. MOUNTED TO WELDED UNI-STRUT RAME. B. TACO 006 CIRCULATOR (P-1) WITH AQUASTAT, BALANCING VALVE AND CHECK VALVE. SEE PUMP SCHEDULE. C. ULL PORT BALL VALVES AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES ON INLETS AND OUTLET. D. 1/2" BYPASS PIPING WITH CHECK VALVE AND BALL VALVE. E. OUTLET TEST CONNECTION WITH BALL VALVE AND 3/4" HOSE CONNECTION AND CAP. PRESSURE PUMP MIN SIZE MECH ELECTRICAL DATA MOTOR DATA BASIN DATA TANK TANK MINIMUM OPERATING MECH MARK LOCATION CAPACITY MARK RECOVERY EWT LWT INPUT V PH HZ AMPS WT BASIS O DESIGN NOTES (DWH-X) (GAL) (ET-XX) (GAL/HR) ( ) ( ) (MBH) (LBS) DWH MECH 100 ET ,470 PVI CONQUEST 20 L 100A-GCL GAS SPECIICATIONS: 3/4-INCH MINIMUM GAS SUPPLY LINE, GAS SUPPLY MINIMUM 3.5-INCH W.C., MAXIMUM 14-INCH W.C. 4. WATER HEATER CONNECTION SIZES: 1-1/2-INCH COLD WATER INLET, 1-1/2-INCH HOT WATER OUTLET, 1-INCH BUILDING RETURN AND 3/4-INCH DRAIN. 6. VENTING: WATER HEATER WILL BE A CATEGORY IV, CONDENSING APPLIANCE UTILIZING SCHEDULED 40 SOLID CORE CPVC PIPE VENTING MATERIAL. 7. PROVIDE MANUACTURER S UL LISTED VENT TERMINATION TO THE OUTDOOR END O THE VENT TO PREVENT WIND, WATER, DEBRIS OR ANIMALS OR OBSTRUCTING R ENTERING THE VENT. 9. PROVIDE WITH POUNDS-TO-INCHES GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR TO REDUCE THE SYSTEM PRESSURE TO APPROXIMATELY THE APPLIANCE PRESSURE SHOWN. COLD HOT PRESSURE COLD WATER HOT WATER HOT WATER TEMPERED WATER MOUNTING GREASE INTERCEPTOR SCHEDULE MARK LOW RATE LIQUID CAP. GREASE CAP. DIM BASIS O MECH LOCATION TYPE (GI-XX) (GPM) (GAL) (LBS) LxWxH (IN) DESIGN NOTES GI-1 STORAGE-002 CERTIIED HYDROMECHANICAL " x 28" x 21" SCHIER GB3 1,2 MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. INTERCEPTOR SHALL HAVE A 4-INCH INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTION, IELD CUT RISER (CR1) AND MEMBRANE CLAMPING COLLAR KIT (CC1). 2. INTERCEPTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM A (TYPE C) STANDARD. MARK LOCATION SERVES EWT EWT LWT CAPACITY DROP INLET INLET RECIRC INLET OUTLET MOUNTING BASIS O DESIGN MECH (TMV-X) ( ) ( ) ( ) (GPM) (PSI) (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) NOTES TMV-1 RM DOMESTIC HOT WATER /2 1/2 1/2 1/2 EXPOSED ON WALL LEONARD TA--L 1,2,3 DIUSER, REGISTER & GRILLE SCHEDULE MARK STATIC PD NC MATERIAL DAMPER TYPE INISH BASIS O DESIGN NOTES (IN WG) (DECIBELS) (Y/N) D STEEL N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS OMNI 24x24 1,4 D ALUMINUM N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS OMNI-AA 24x24 1,4 D STEEL N SURACE WHITE TITUS OMNI 24x24 1,4 D ALUMINUM N SURACE WHITE TITUS OMNI 12x12 1,4 D STEEL N SURACE WHITE TITUS L HT 1,2,4 D STEEL N SURACE WHITE TITUS L JT 1,3,4 R STEEL N SURACE ALUMINUM TITUS 301RS 1 G STEEL N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS 8R 1 G STEEL N SURACE WHITE TITUS 350 RL 1 G ALUMINUM N SURACE WHITE TITUS 8R 1 G STEEL N LAY-IN ALUMINUM TITUS 8R 1 G ALUMINUM N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS 8R 1 1. SEE PLANS OR LOCATION, NECK SIZE AND CM. 2. LINEAR DIUSER SHALL HAVE A SINGLE 1.5-INCH SLOT AND INCLUDE BPI-15 INSULATED PLENUM AND BOARDER TYPE LINEAR DIUSER SHALL HAVE A SINGLE 1-INCH SLOT AND INCLUDE BPI-15 INSULATED PLENUM AND BOARDER TYPE REER TO DETAIL 1/M4.1 OR CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS. TERMINAL BOX SCHEDULE - ELECTRIC REHEAT MARK ROM AREA MAX MIN MAX DOWN Pd RADIATED DISCHARGE kw V PH MCA MOP LAT MODEL INLET MECH (ATU-X) UNIT SERVED (IN WG) (IN WG) (IN WG) (NC) (NC) ( ) (DIA) NOTES ATU-001 RTU STORAGE TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-002 RTU STORAGE TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-101 RTU RETAIL, 102-TASTING ROOM, 119-BAR 1,720 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-102 RTU LOUNGE, 1S3 STAIR TITUS DESV 12 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-103 RTU RECEPTION HALL (NORTH) 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-104 RTU RECEPTION HALL (SOUTH), 110-CORRIDOR 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-105 RTU CONERENCE ROOM, 114-MECH/ELEC TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-106 RTU CATERING STAGING, 117-STORAGE TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-107 RTU OOD PREP & 118-MECH TITUS DESV 08 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-108 RTU PRIVATE TASTING TITUS DESV 08 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-201 RTU BAR, 202-GALLERY, 2S3 STAIR 1,410 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-202 RTU RECEPTION HALL (NORTH) & 212-ELEVATOR LOBBY 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-203 RTU RECEPTION HALL (SOUTH) 1, TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-204 RTU CONERENCE ROOM & 208-STORAGE TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 ATU-205 RTU MECH/ELEC & 210-CATERING STAGING TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5 MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH NON USED DISCONNECT. 2. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 1/2-INCH THICK IBER REE SOUND INSULATION. 3. ELECTRIC HEAT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A MODULATING SCR HEATER. 4. ELECTRIC HEATING CAPACITY IS BASED ON NOTED HEATING CM. 5. PRESSURE DROP IS BASED ON MAXIMUM CM. AN SCHEDULE MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. AN SHALL HAVE AN ECM MOTOR WITH VARI-GREEN CONTROL DIAL ON MOTOR. 2. AN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 12-INCH ROO CURB. 3. AN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH. 4. AN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SPEED CONTROLLER ACTORY MOUNTED TO THE AN. 5. PROVIDE WITH BACKDRAT DAMPER. 6. INTERLOCK AN WITH LIGHT SWITCH. AN DATA 7. PROVIDE WITH HOODED WALL CAP (GREENHECK WC-6). PRIMARY CM STATIC PRESSURE ARI NOISE RATING BASIS O DESIGN ELECTRICAL DATA AN ESP AN DRIVE HP MAX MECH MARK LOCATION TYPE CM (IN WG) RPM TYPE [WATTS] V PH HZ SONES BASIS O DESIGN NOTES E-1 ROO CENT DIRECT 1/ GREENHECK CUE-095-VG 1,2,3 E MEN'S RR CENT DIRECT 80 W GREENHECK SP-B110 3,4,5,6,7 E WOMEN'S RR CENT DIRECT 80 W GREENHECK SP-B110 3,4,5,6,7 SPLIT SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT SSOU-1 SSIU / INVER R-410A / TRANE 4TXK3809A10N 1,2,3 SSOU-2 SSIU / INVER R-410A / TRANE 4TXK3809A10N 1,2,3 1. RERIGERANT PIPE QUANTITIES AND SIZE TO BE PER MANUACTURER'S PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS AND SPECIICATION SECTION MCA IS OR BOTH INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNITS (SYSTEM). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO OUTDOOR UNIT, AND PROVIDE POWER WIRING BETWEEN OUTDOOR AND INDOOR UNITS. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 3. PROVIDE WITH THE OLLOWING: A. LOW AMBIENT KIT OR OPERATION DOWN TO 0 DEG.. B. WIND BALE TO IMPROVE UNIT OPERATION DURING HIGH WINDS AND OR LOW AMBIENT CONDITIONS. SPLIT SYSTEM INDOOR UNIT SSIU-1 ELEV EQUIP-211 SSOU / / TRANE 4MXW3809A10N 9'-6" 3/4" 1,2,3 SSIU-2 STAIR - 1S2 SSOU / / TRANE 4MXW3809A10N 9'-6" 3/4" 1,2,3 1. MOUNTING HEIGHT SHOWN IS A MINIMUM, TO ACILITATE CONDENSATE DRAINAGE. INAL HEIGHT MAY BE HIGHER TO ACCOMMODATE CLEARANCES OR ACILITATE ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE. 2. INDOOR UNIT IS POWERED ROM OUTDOOR UNIT. 3. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH WIRED THERMOSTAT / CONTROLLER. ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL SECTION AIR-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP PERORMANCE GAS HEAT SUPPLY AN(S) EXHAUST AN ELECTRICAL DATA WINTER HEAT RECOVERY SUMMER HEAT RECOVERY HEATING MODE COOLING MODE COND. NO. CAPACITY MIN QTY QTY DIMENSIONS MARK LOCATION SERVES OA EA OA EAT RA EAT LAT OA EAT RA EAT LAT EAT LAT CAP AMB TEMP COP EAT LAT TOTAL CAP SENS CAP AMB TEMP RER AN DATA O COMP EER STAGES INPUT OUTPUT CM CM ESP AN & CM ESP AN & V PH Hz LA MCA MOP H x W x L WEIGHT MECH (CM) (CM) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) (MBH) ( DB) ( WB) ( DB) ( WB) MBH MBH NO. COMP. QT-SIZE (MBH) (MBH) (IN WG) RPM HP (IN WG) RPM HP (INCHES) (LBS) BASIS O DESIGN NOTES RTU-1 ROO 1ST LR 3,560 3, R-410A TONS TO ,000 2, ,914 (2) 4 HP 3, ,558 (1) 4 HP x 74 x 208 5,130 TRANE ASHP HORIZON OAGE210 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,11 CC-1 RTU-2 ROO 2ND LR 2,151 1, R-410A TONS TO ,600 1, ,644 (2) 4 HP 1, ,180 (1) 4 HP x 74 x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evisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. M5.1-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

123 LEGEND NOTES LEGEND NOTES ARE COMMON TO ALL SOME NOTES MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS SHEET A A.1 A.5 B C WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE 3" WATER SERVICE OR CONT SEE C P3.1 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 6" IRE SERVICE OR CONT SEE C SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE " W (6 WU) 4" W UP (37 WU) 4" W UP 2" V UP CO 4" W (20 WU) 4" W UP TO WC-2 4" W UP TO WC-2 2" V UP 2" W UP TO D 1-1/2" V UP 2" V UP 1-1/2" W UP TO L-1 2" W UP TO D 4" W (64 WU) 2" M 4" W (58 WU) GAS SERVICE UP TO GAS METER (BY UTILITY) SP-2 STORAGE 001 2" M UP 10 P3.1 4" W UP TO WC-1 2" V UP 4" W UP TO WC-1 2" W UP TO UR-2 2" W UP TO UR-1 1-1/2" V UP 2" V UP CO UP 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW UP 12 2" AW UP 2" AV UP P3.1 1/2" SCW UP 1/2" HW UP 12 2" AV UP P3.1 2" AW UP 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW UP 4" W (68 WU) TYPICAL ALL UNDERGROUND PIPING 4" AW (53 AWU) 9 P3.1 6 P3.1 2" W UP TO L-1 2" V UP 4" W UP TO WC-2 3" CW (224.5 CU) 2" S-1 2" S-1 2" S-1 2" S-1 4" W (125 WU) 2" V DN 3" AW PROVIDE RAMING TO SUPPORT UNIT ABOVE LOOR 2" V (6 VU) 2" AV UP 2" S-1 1/2" CW UP 1-1/2" AV UP CO 1" 110 HW (9 HU), 3" CW (178.5 CU), 3/4" SCW (3 SCU) & 1/2" 110 HWC ( 1 GPM) UP 3" AW (34 AWU) 4" AW (47 AWU) 2" V UP 3" W UP TO MS-1 2" W (6 WU) AW W CC-1 CO 2" W (4 WU) 3" W 2" M 4" W TO SP-3 STORAGE SP P3.1 GI-1 3/4" CW (3 CU) 2" V 2" W UP STAIR 0S4 1 P3.1 2" AV UP 1-1/2" W UP TO SINK 1/2" CW & 110-HW UP 1/2" 110 HW CAPPED 1/2" CW UPOR UTURE 2" AV UP 2" AV UP 3/4" CW & 110-HW UP 3" W UP TO S 3" AW (17 AWU) 2" AW UP TO S SET AT 1 GPM AW W 4" W (13 WU) 2" V UP 2" S-1 4" W (15 WU) 2" V (6 VU) CC-1 2" D-1 2" S-1 2" W UP 2" V UP 4" D-1 1-1/2" V UP 1-1/2" AV UP 3" W UP TO MS-1 2" V UP 4" W UP TO WC-2 2" V UP 3" W UP 3/4" CW UP 1/2" HW UP 1/2" SCW UP 2" V UP IRE SERVICE 3/4" 110-HW (1.5 HU) 2" M UP ROM SP-3 1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 2" AW UP TO S GAS SERVICE UP TO GAS METERS (BY UTILITY) 4" W UP TO STANDPIPE 1409 SILVER STREET GAS SERVICE (BY UTILITY) KEYNOTE LEGEND - PLUMBING KEY VALUE P2 KEYNOTE TEXT CONTRACTOR TO EXPOSE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER AT WYE IN LOCATION AND NOTIY THE ARCHITECT AND CITY O ASHLAND OR AN INSPECTION PRIOR TO TAPPING THE EXISTING SEWER MAIN. PLUMBING PLAN, UNDERGROUND / BASEMENT LEVEL P /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. P0.1-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION 1425 SILVER STREET GAS SERVICE (BY UTILITY) EXISTING GAS MAIN EXISTING SANITARY SEWER MAIN GAS SERVICE UP TO GAS METER (BY UTILITY) TWO-WAY GRADE CLEANOUT 14 P3.1 7 P3.1 PIPE SLEEVE 4" W (148 WU) I.E. = 94'-6" (ARCH) P SILVER STREET GAS SERVICE (BY UTILITY) G C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :13:01 AM NORTH PLUMBING PLAN, UNDERGROND / BASEMENT LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

124 LEGEND NOTES A A.1 A.5 B C WALL MOUNTED PIV DC WH-1 A A.1 A.5 B C 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE STAIR 2S3 UP 3/4" CW DN UP GAS SERVICE DN P1 2" AW (1 AWU) 1/2" CW UP TO TRAP PRIMER 2" M DN 2" M DN TO 4" STANDPIPE WITH AIR GAP ITTING AT 42" A... 2" AW (11 AWU) 2" V DN 2" V UP 5 P2.1 CO 3'-0" MIN STAIR 1S3 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 2" AW UP TO S-1 LOUNGE 1/2" CW (1.5 CU) 105 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) 1-1/2" AW UP /2" AV UP P3.1 CORRIDOR 108 UP STORAGE 104 STORAGE 103 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW UP 1-1/2" AW UP /2" AV UP P3.1 2" AW UP TO S-1 1/2" SCW UP 2" AW UP TO S-1 1/2" CW & 110-HW UP 1-1/2" AV UP (TYP 5) 3/4" CW (3.5 CU) 3/4" 110-HW (3 HU) 1/2" SCW (2 SCU) SET AT 1 GPM 3/4" HW (3 HU) & 2-1/2" CW (64 CU) UP 2 1/2" CW (67.5 CU) 2" CW (35.5 CU) 1" 110-HW (4.5 HU) 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) STAIR 1S2 TASTING ROOM 102 3/4" CW UP RECEPTION HALL P2.1 RETAIL 101 1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 1" 110-HW (9 HU) 2 1/2" CW (131.5 CU) OICE 118 BAR 119 4" RD-1 (1,485 S) 4" SD (1,485 S) 4" ORD-1 (1,575 S) 4" RD-1 (1,575 S) 1" 110 HW (9 HU), 3" CW (178.5 CU), 3/4" SCW (3 SCU) & 1/2" 110 HWC ( 1 GPM) DN 1/2" HW & CW DN TO 5'-0" OR SOAP DISPENSER WITH PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER MEN'S RESTROOM 112 CO 2" M DN P3.1 ROM SP-1 ELEVATOR 1E1 CO 4" OSD (1,485 S) 2" V DN CATERING STAGING 116 CORRIDOR 110 4" ORD-1 (1,485 S) 3" V (42 VU) 8 SP-1 PRIVATE TASTING 123 INSTALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE BETWEEN JOISTS OOD PREP 120 MS-1 CONERENCE ROOM 115 MECH/ELEC 114 KEG COOLER 122 OSET PIPING DN TIGHT TO BEAM 6" SD (3,060 S) 6" OSD (3,060 S) 3/4" 110-HWC (2 GPM) 1" SCW (4.5 SCU) 2 1/2" CW (80.75 CU) 1 1/4" 110-HW (15 HU) 2 1/2" V (35 AVU) DWH-1 2" V DN P1 ET-1 1" G (2 PSI) UP STORAGE 117 3" V (48 VU) UP 7 P2.1 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 MECH/ELEC/CUST 121 TMV-1 W/ P P3.1 P2.1 6" OSD (3,060 S) 6" SD (3,060 S) 1 1/2" SCW (36 SCU) 1" G (2 PSI KBH) 3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 1" 110-HW (6.25 HU) 2 1/2" CW (67.5 CU) 2 GAS METERS CC P2.1 6 P2.1 STAIR 1S3 BAR 201 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 A1 GALLERY 202 CORRIDOR 205 3" V UP TO 4" VTR STORAGE 104 UP 3/4" HW (3 HU) & 2-1/2" CW (64 CU) DN STAIR 2S1 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW UP(1.5 HU) 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) STAIR 2S1 STAIR 1S1 STAIR 2S2 WH-1 3/4" CW DN RECEPTION HALL 206 CONERENCE ROOM 207 ELEVATOR LOBBY 212 OUTDOOR SEATING P3.1 3" V UP TO 4" VTR A2 CATERING STAGING 210 6" RD-1 (3,320 S) 1" CW UP TO RH-1 (ON ROO) 4" ORD-1 (1,805 S) 4" RD-1 (1,805 S) 4" V UP TO 4" VTR A3 1-1/2" V DN 1" G (2 PSI) DN MS-1 2" V DN 1/2" HW & CW DN ROM 5'-0" OR SOAP DISPENSOR WITH PRESSURE VACUUMM BREAKER STORAGE 208 P7 ELEVATOR 2E1 CO CO ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211 6" ORD-1 (3,320 S) MECH/ELEC 209 2" V (20 VU) UP 4 P2.1 3/4" G (2 PSI) UP TO RTU-2 3/4" G (2 PSI) UP TO RTU-2 KEYNOTE LEGEND - PLUMBING KEY VALUE P1 P7 KEYNOTE TEXT CONNECT RELOCATED GAS METER TO NEW GAS SERVICE AND EXISTING GAS PIPING SERVING BUILDING. MAINTAIN MINIMUM O 3'-0" ROM ANY DOOR OPENING AND ANY ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND 10-T CLEARANCE ROM ANY AIR INTAKE. COORDINATE LOCATION AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS WITH GAS UTILITY. COORDINATE WORK WITH BUILDING TENANT AND OWNER. TERMINATE 1" G (2 PSI) WITH VALVE AND CAP (OR UTURE) 36" A. PLUMBING PLAN, MAIN & UPPER LEVELS P /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. P1.1-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION 3/4" G (2 PSI) DN 6" SD & OSD (5,125 S) DN D E G D E G C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :13:19 AM NORTH PLUMBING PLAN, MAIN LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH PLUMBING PLAN, UPPER LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

125 A LEGEND NOTES LEGEND NOTES ARE COMMON TO ALL SOME NOTES MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS SHEET B C 4 CO 2" AW (11 AWU) 3/4" 110-HW (3 HU) 3/4" CW (3.5 CU) 1/2" SCW (2 SCU) 2" V UP 1-1/2" AV DN 1/2" SCW DN 1/2" HW DN 4" W (4 WU) 2" V (4 VU) 2" W UP TO D D-1 WC-2 4" W UP TO WC-2 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN 2" AW DN 12 2" AV DN P EXTEND 1/2" CW TO TRAP PRIMER EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMER PIPING TO S-1. MAINTAIN 1/4" SLOPE PER T. 1/2" SCW DN 1/2" HW DN CAPPED OR UTURE EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMER PIPING TO S-1. MAINTAIN 1/4" SLOPE PER T. 4 EXTEND 1/2" CW TO TRAP PRIMER P3 P3 12 2" AV DN P " AW DN 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN " AV DN 2" AV DN BAR 119 2" AV DN EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMER PIPING TO S-1. MAINTAIN 1/4" SLOPE PER T. 2" AV UP 1/2" CW DN 1-1/2" V DN P3 4" RD-1 (1,575 S) 4" SD (1,485 S) 4" OSD (1,485 S) GI-1 OOD PREP 120 4" ORD-1 (1,575 S) 6" SD (3,060 S) 2" S-1 2" V (10 AVU) 2" V (13 AVU) 1/2" CW DN 2" V (6 AVU) 2" V (4 AVU) /2" V (8 VU) 2 1/2" V (22 AVU) 2 1/2" V (32 AVU) 3" S A STAIR 1S4 6" OSD (3,060 S) 2" S-1 1/2" CW & 110-HW DN 1-1/2" AW DN 1 1/2" V (9 AVU) CC-1 3/4" CD TO S KEG COOLER B CC /2" W UP TO S-1 2" W DN 2" V DN CC-1 3" V UP 2 1/2" CW (78 CU) 1 1/4" 110-HW (13.75 HU) 3/4" CW (3 CU) 3/4" 110-HW (3 HU) 16 CATERING STAGING 116 2" S " S-1 6" OSD (3,060 S) 6" SD (3,060 S) 1" G (2 PSI KBH) 1" 110-HW (10.75 HU) 2 1/2" CW (75 CU) 1 1/2" SCW (36 SCU) /2" W DN 3.9 4" W DN (37 WU) WC-1 WC-1 3/4" 110-HW (3 HU) WOMEN'S RESTROOM L /2" CW (1.5 CU) L-1 2 (TYP) P3.1 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 4" W (10 WU) UR-2 D-1 2" W UP TO D 1-1/2" W UP 1/2" CW (1.5 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) CC-1 WC-2 UR-1 2" V (20 VU) 3" V (22 VU) B 1-1/2" V UP (TYP 5) 2" V DN 1-1/2" V UP 2" V UP 4" W UP TO WC-1 2" V UP 1/2" SCW (2 SCU) P6 4" W UP TO WC-1 1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 2" CW (34 CU) 2" CW (35.5 CU) 1" 110-HW (4.5 HU) 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) 2" CW (20 CU) P6 P5 2" W UP TO UR-2 2" W UP TO UR-1 1-1/2" V UP 4" W UP TO WC-2 5 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RESTROOM 106 & 107 P2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2" V UP 3" V UP A 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :13:35 AM 5 2 1/2" V (35 AVU) 1 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RMS 119 & 120 P2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMER PIPING TO S-1. MAINTAIN 1/4" SLOPE PER T. P3 1/2" CW DN BAR 201 2" S " S-1 2" S-1 2" AV DN A P3 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN 1-1/2" AW DN /2" AV DN P3.1 1/2" SCW DN EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMER PIPING TO S-1. MAINTAIN 1/4" SLOPE PER T. 1/2" CW DN 1-1/2" AV DN /2" AW DN P3.1 1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN 1-1/2" AV DN (TYP 5) 3 LARGE SCALE PLAN, BAR 201 P SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2" V DN CC-1 6" RD-1 (3,320 S) G 3" V DN 4" V UP TO 4" VTR A2 2" S-1 2" V DN 1-1/2" V DN 2" V UP 2" V (8 VU) CO 6" SD (3,320 S) 16 2" V (4 VU) CATERING STAGING 210 6" ORD-1 (3,320 S) 36 1" CW UP TO RH-1 & 1-1/4" CW DN 1/2" DRAIN DN TO S-1 ROM RH-1 4 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RM 210 P2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" CO 6" OSD (3,320 S) 6" SD (3,060 S) 6" OSD (3,060 S) CC-1 CC-1 2" V UP & DN 2" W DN, 1-1/2" V UP OOD SERVICE PLUMBING CONNECTION SCHEDULE ITEM # QTY 35 1 DISPENSER, BEER PLUMBING REMARKS: 1-1/4" CW UP 2. ALL WORK TO BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING CODES. 5. ALL WATER LINES TO BE VALVED AT STUB-IN LOCATIONS. ICE MAKER(S), STEAMER(S), ETC. IS SET IN PLACE. G 3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 1" 110-HW (6.25 HU) 2 1/2" CW (67.5 CU) 2 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RM 116 P2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" CATEGORY REQUIREMENTS REER TO MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS 3. WATER AND DRAIN LINES TO BE INSIDE O WALLS, SURACE MOUNTED WORK IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. 11. COOKING EQUIPMENT GAS PRESSURE TO BE 7-14" W.C. OR NATURAL GAS AND 10" W.C. OR LP GAS. DURING CONSTRUCTION. SHORT RADIUS ACTORY "ELLS" ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 15. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL WATER HEATER. CW CONN HW CONN WASTE SIZE HEIGHT A SIZE 4. ALL PLUMBING CONNECTION HEIGHTS ARE TO CENTER LINE O ROUGH-IN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 9. INSULATE 140 OR HIGH WATER LINES RUNNING ROM WATER HEATER TO INAL HOOK-UP ON EQUIPMENT. 13. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL A CHECK VALVE IN CARBONATOR WATER SUPPLY LINE. TEMP HEIGHT A DIRECT HEIGHT A INDIRECT [IN] [IN] [IN] [DEG..] [IN] [IN] [IN] [IN] 1 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" " 1-1/2" UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" " 1-1/2" HAND SINK, WALL MOUNTED 1/2" 20" 1/2" " 1-1/2" UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 12" 1-1/2" THE PLANS SHOW ONLY THE REQUIREMENTS OR OOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT BEING URNISHED BY THE OOD SERVICE CONTRACTOR, OR ALL OTHER 6. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS IN LINE BEORE ALL SOLENOID VALVES. I.E.AT DISHWASHER, DISPOSER(S), 7. ALL DRAIN LINES ARE TO BE TRAPPED. SUPPLY ALL INDIRECT WASTELINES WITH A TRAP AND AN AIR GAP AT LOOR RECEPTACLE. 8. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL INDIRECT WASTE LINES (I.E.: WALK-IN COOLERS/REEZERS, RERIGERATED BASES, HOT WELLS). 10. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO MOUNT ALL DISPOSERS AUCETS, BASKET DRAINS, TO / ON EQUIPMENT WITH INAL CONNECTION TO ROUGH-IN(S) ATER EQUIPMENT 12. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL A GAS SOLENOID VALVE WITH INTERLOCK TO EXHAUST VENTILATOR IRE PROTECTION SYSTEM. 14. BEVERAGE CONDUIT TO BE PVC / EMT WITH SMOOTH INTERIOR AND ONE MINIMUM 24-INCH RADIUS SWEEP BEND AT EACH END. PVC / EMT TO BE SEALED 16. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN ALL IXTURE PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS AND ROUGH-IN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIIED WITH EQUIPMENT BEING PROVIDED. PLUMBING REMARKS 3 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 4 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 6 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 7 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 8 1 WAREWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 6" 5/8" TO LOOR SINK 9 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 10 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 12 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 13 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 16A 1 DISHTABLE, STRAIGHT, 3 COMPARTMENT SINK 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO LOOR SINK 16B 1 WAREWASHER, DOOR TYPE, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 73" 1/2" " 1-1/2" TO LOOR SINK 18 1 WALK-IN COOLER 3/4" TO LOOR SINK 20 1 ICE MAKER W/ BIN 1/2" 3/4" TO LOOR SINK 23 1 SINK, NS, 3 COMPARTMENT, 18 GAUGE 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO LOOR SINK 24 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 12" 1-1/2" 14 TO LOOR SINK 26 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 27 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 29 1 WAREWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 6" 1/2" 5/8" TO LOOR SINK 31 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO LOOR SINK 32 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO LOOR SINK 36 1 SINK, NS, 3 COMPARTMENT, 18 GAUGE 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO LOOR SINK 2" W DN 2" V DN WH-1 3/4" CW DN P2.1 P2.1 3/4" CW (3 CU) SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" A L-1 WC-2 MEN'S RESTROOM 112 P5 1 1/4" CW (13 CU) CC-1 1-1/2" W DN 2" V (5 VU) WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 L-1 2 L-1 P3.1 (TYP) 2" V (17 VU) D-1 P6 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 D-1 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) CORRIDOR 110 GAS SERVICE DN P5 P5 WC-2 WC-1 WC-1 3" V (31 VU) B 2" CW (30 CU) P6 2" CW (20 CU) 1/2" HW & CW DN TO 5'-0" OR SOAP DISPENSER WITH PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER 3" W UP TO MS-1 1/2" HW & CW UP UR-2 UR-1 B WC-2 1 1/2" CW (14.5 CU) 3" W (5 WU) 1 1/4" G (2 PSI - 1,470 KBTU) E G 3" V (69 VU) WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 2" V DN 1-1/2" V DN 2" V DN 2" V DN 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) 3" V (32 VU) 2" CW (32 CU) 1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HU) MECH/ELEC /2" V UP 2" V UP 2" W DN 2" W DN 1-1/2" V DN 2" V DN 3" V DN 6 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RESTROOM 203 & 204 6" OSD (3,060 S) 6" SD (3,060 S) 1 1/2" SCW (36 SCU) 1" G (2 PSI KBH) 2 1/2" CW (67.5 CU) 1" 110-HW (6.25 HU) 3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM) 2 L-1 P3.1 (TYP) 8" DSN (3060 S) A WS-1 MS-1 8" DSN (3060 S) 7 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RESTROOM 110 & /2" CW & SCW DN DRAIN ROM WS-2 INTO MS P5 2" V DN 15 P3.1 3" W DN 3/4" G (2 PSI) UP 6" SD & OSD UP CC-1 KEYNOTE LEGEND - PLUMBING KEY VALUE P3 P5 P6 KEYNOTE TEXT CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SIOUX CHIE MODEL 695-ES05 ELECTRONIC TRAP SEAL PRIMER SYSTEM. SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE 120 VAC CONTROL UNIT WITH 24 HOUR TIMER WITH RELAY, LEAD REE VACUUM BREAKER, ELECTRONIC STAINLESS STEEL NORMALLY CLOSED SOLENOID VALVE WITH DISTRIBUTION MANIOLD AND 1/2-INCH COMPRESSION CONNECTORS MOUNTED IN A STAINLESS STEEL SURACE MOUNTED ENCLOSURE. WATER HAMMER ARRESTER (WHA). LETTER DENOTES PDI RATING. INSTALL NORMALLY OPEN BALL VALVE IN BRANCH PIPE (OR ISOLATION O WHA) AND LOCATE BEHIND HARD CEILING ACCESS PANEL. SEE DETAIL 5/P3.1. RUN WATER PIPING ULL SIZE THE ENTIRE LENGTH O THE CHASE. BRANCH O TO IXTURES WITH PIPE SIZES PER THE PLUMBING IXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE. PLUMBING LARGE SCALE PLANS P /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 ATTACHMENT NO. P2.1-1 TO ADDENDUM 1 DATE: 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

126 3" V (21 VU) 2" V (17 VU) 2" S-1 1 1/2" AW (1 AWU) CO 2" AW (4 AWU) 2" S-1 # SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE " V (27 VU) 1 1/2" AV (3 AVU) 2" S-1 1 1/2" V (1 VU) 3" V (31 VU) 1 1/2" V (1 VU) #34 1 1/2" AV (1 AVU) A1 4" VTR 3" V (69 VU) 3" V (39 VU) 3" V (35 VU) 4" W (10 WU) L-1 3" V (33 VU) L-1 4" W (14 WU) 2" AW (11 AWU) 4" W (4 WU) D-1 WC-1 2" V (10 VU) WC-1 1 1/2" AV (3 AVU) 1 1/2" V (1 AVU) WC-2 2" V (6 VU) 2" V (4 VU) 3" V (30 VU) 2" V (14 VU) 2" V (5 VU) 4" W (4 WU) 4" W (64 WU) WC-2 4" W (4 WU) 4" W (8 WU) 3" V (26 VU) 3" V (22 VU) 4" W (60 WU) WC-2 MS-1 D-1 2" V (20 VU) D-1 4" W (68 WU) A3 4" VTR 2" V (20 VU) 4" W (58 WU) 2" W (2 WU) 4" W (68 WU) 4" W (125 WU) 2" V (15 VU) L-1 CO L-1 1 1/2" W (2 WU) 2" W (2 WU) 4" W (68 WU) 4" W (121 WU) 2" V (16 VU) 4" W (37 WU) 4" W (20 WU) 4" W (10 WU) WC-1 4" AW (53 AWU) 2" W (4 WU) 4" W (6 WU) D-1 AW W 2" V (2 VU) WC-1 2" M WC-2 2" V (4 VU) 2" V (4 VU) 2" V (3 VU) 2" S-1 2" W (6 WU) 2" S-1 #16 2" V (8 VU) 4" AW (47 AWU) #16 A2 2" V (2 VU) 4" VTR SP-2 4" V (56 VU) W AW 2" S-1 3" V (48 VU) 3" V (48 VU) 4" W (13 WU) 2" AW (1 AVU) 2 1/2" V (35 AVU) AV V 2" V (7 VU) CO MS-1 1 1/2" V (3 AVU) 2" S-1 #1 4" STANDPIPE OR ELEVATOR SUMP 3" V (42 VU) 3" AW (34 AWU) 2" S-1 2" V (3 AVU) 2" D-1 2" AW (3 AWU) 2" S-1 3" AW (34 AWU) 2" V (6 VU) 2" W (2 WU) CC-1 2" V (4 AVU) 2" V (6 AVU) 2" S-1 2" S-1 2" V (3 AVU) 3" AW (27 AWU) 1 1/2" V (1 AVU) 2" S-1 2" AW (3 AWU) 2" V (3 AVU) 2" AW (3 AWU) 3" AW (21 AWU) #15 2" AW (1 AVU) 2" AW (3 AWU) 2" V (10 AVU) 3" AW (17 AWU) 1 1/2" AW (1 AVU) 1 1/2" V (8 VU) 2" V (13 AVU) 2" V (1 AVU) 1 1/2" V (9 AVU) V AV 2 1/2" V (22 AVU) #16 GI-1 3" S-1 2" W (3 WU) 2" V (6 VU) 3" AW 1 1/2" V (5 VU) 1 1/2" V (3 VU) 2" S-1 2" M 2" V (6 VU) SP-3 2" V 4" W (6 WU) 4" D-1 P4.1 PLUMBING WASTE AND VENT RISERS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 03/30/2018 AND ADDITION L-1 WC-2 3" W (5 WU) 2" V (10 VU) 2" V (9 VU) ATTACHMENT NO. P4.1-1 TO CC-1 DATE: 03/30/ /2" V (1 VU) 2" W (1 WU) 4" W (125 WU) 3" W (5 WU) 2" V (5 VU) 4" W (4 WU) L-1 2" V (4 VU) WC-2 MS-1 C:\Revit\ _MP_2016_tmcdevitt@dlrgroup.com.rvt 3/30/ :13:40 AM P4.1 NO SCALE DECO 4" W (145 WU) 1 WASTE & VENT RISER DIAGRAM 4" W (15 WU) 3" W (5 WU) Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

127 S KEYED NOTES KEYED NOTES KEYED NOTES J 15 1B- 8,10 S 1B - 3 S 19 S 92" 1B- 15 J ATU " TV 1B- 33 TV J J J J 1B B- 32 1B- 34 1B- 36 1B " 1B- 17 ATU-107 1B- 5 5 LARGE SCALE - OOD SERVICE 120 E2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" B B- 13 1B B - 45,47 NEMA 6-20R 1B- 7 1B- 53,55 1B- 9 1B- 40 1B KEY VALUE KEY TEXT 1 INSTALL DEVICES AND CONDUIT 12 INCHES ABOVE MAIN LEVEL INISHED LOOR. 2 40A/3P ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH SHUNT TRIP ACCESSORY. CONNECT SHUNT TRIP TO PUSH BUTTON IN PIT AND A CONTROL MODULE. 3 30A/3P DISCONNECT USED AT 15A OR ELEVATOR CAB LIGHTS. 4 ELEVATOR STOP SWITCH. CONNECT TO SHUNT TRIP BREAKER IN ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211. MOUNT 42 INCHES ABOVE MAIN LEVEL INISHED LOOR. 5 LOOR BOX B-1 (TYP), CAST IRON OR ON-GRADE APPLICATION, DUPLEX COVER PLATE OR TILE INSTALLATION WITH LIP LID, BRASS INISH. PROVIDE LEGRAND 887B-895T OR APPROVED EQUAL. 6 LOOR BOX B-2 (TYP), STAMPED STEEL OR ABOVE-GRADE APPLICATION, DUPLEX COVER PLATE OR TILE INSTALLATION WITH LIP LID, BRASS INISH. PROVIDE LEGRAND 885B-895T OR APPROVED EQUAL. 7 MOUNT RECEPTACLE INSIDE O CABINET OR POS POWER. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT AND GROMMET IN COUNTER. 8 LOOR BOX B-3 (TYP), EPOXY COATING OR ON-GRADE APPLICATION, 4-GANG. PROVIDE LEGRAND EB45S-OG BOX OR APPROVED EQUAL, EB8-MB 4-GANG MOUNTING BRACKET OR DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS, AND LUSH STYLE COVER WITH SOLID LID EB45BTBZ, BRONZE INISH. 9 LOOR BOX B-4 (TYP), STAMPED STEEL OR ABOVE-GRADE APPLICATION. 4-GANG. PROVIDE LEGRAND EB45S BOX OR APPROVED EQUAL, EB8-MB 4-GANG MOUNTING BRACKET OR DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS, AND LUSH STYLE COVER WITH SOLID LID EB45BTBZ, BRONZE INISH. 10 STACK INVERTERS ON WALL. 11 ROUTE CONDUITS UP EXISTING WALL TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON 2ND LEVEL TO EED CIRCUITS ROM PANEL 1C. COMBINE CIRCUITS AND INCREASE CONDUIT SIZE PER NEC WHERE POSSIBLE TO REDUCE CONDUIT QUANTITIES. ROUTE CONDUIT STRAIGHT UP WALL TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH HAND RAIL. UTILIZE COMPRESSION ITTINGS AND MINIMIZE WALL SUPPORTS. CC-1 KEY VALUE KEY TEXT 12 ROUTE CONDUITS UP EXISTING WALL ROM PANEL 1C TO 1ST LEVEL STRUCTURE TO EED CEILING LOADS ON 1ST LEVEL AND LOOR LOADS ON 2ND LEVEL. COMBINE CIRCUITS AND INCREASE CONDUIT SIZE PER NEC WHERE POSSIBLE TO REDUCE CONDUIT QUANTITIES. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH HAND RAIL. UTILIZE COMPRESSION ITTINGS AND MINIMIZE WALL SUPPORTS. 13 PROVIDE NEW 20A, 3 WIRE CORD AND NEMA 5-20R PLUG OR EXISTING RERIGERATOR UNIT. 14 MOUNT RECEPTACLES THIS ROOM AT 48 INCHES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. LABEL ALL RECEPTACLES THIS ROOM WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER. 15 DISHWASHER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION AT 18 INCHES, (3) #8, #10G, 3/4" C. 16 BEVERAGE COOLING SYSTEM POWER, (3) #10, #10G, 3/4" C. 17 ALL CONDUIT IN KEG COOLER IS TO BE BUILT INTO WALL PANELS. EXPOSED CONDUIT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE EXCEPT WHERE NOTED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL ROUGH-INS AND INTERCONNECTIONS REQUIRED OR KEG COOLER INCLUDING CONNECTIONS TO COMPRESSOR, BLOWER COIL, TIMER, HEATERS, AND LIGHTING. COORDINATE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS WITH COOLER PROVIDER. 18 ROUTE CONDUIT TO JUNCTION BOX ON EVAPORATOR COIL. EXPOSED CONDUIT IS ACCEPTABLE OR THIS LOCATION. 19 PROVIDE ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONS OR KEG COOLER TIME CLOCK AND THERMOMETER. 20 PROVIDE ADDITIONAL JUNCTION BOXES AS NEEDED OR KEG COOLER SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS. 21 POWER OR ICE MACHINE, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER. PROVIDE NEW 20A, 3 WIRE CORD AND NEMA 5-20R PLUG. 22 CONDENSER WIRING: (3) #10, #10G, 3/4" C. CONDENSER LOCATED ON ROO. PROVIDE NEMA 3R 30A/3P DISCONNECT MOUNTED TO UNISTRUT RAME. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH COOLER INSTALLER. PROVIDE PATHWAY AS NEEDED BETWEEN CONDENSER COOLER. KEY VALUE KEY TEXT 23 COORDINATE RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS WITH OWNER'S A/V CONTRACTOR. RECEPTACLES CAN BE SURACE MOUNTED. 24 RECEPTACLE PROVIDED WITH AND MOUNTED TO MECHANICAL UNIT. CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. 25 ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND BOXES THIS SPACE PRE-COLORED BLACK. SEE SPECIICATION. 26 PROVIDE SINGLE-GANG BOX AT 48" WITH 1"C TO PANEL 1B OR UTURE EQUIPMENT. 27 EXISTING PANEL TO BE MAINTAINED DURING CONSTRUCTION UNTIL THE TASTING ROOM CLOSES OR REMODEL. SEE DEMOLITION ONE-LINE DIAGRAM OR TEMPORARY POWER EED INORMATION. TEMPORARY POWER TO BE ESTABLISHED PRIOR TO DEMOLISHING EXISTING SERVICE TO THE BUILDING. COORDINATE ANY OUTAGE WITH THE OWNER. 28 POWER OR SUMP PUMP, GCI RECEPTACLE TO BE PROVIDED WITH AUDIBLE ALARM. 29 RECIRCUIT EXISTING RECEPTACLES TO NEW PANEL. 30 POWER OR WATER HEATER RECIRCULATING PUMP. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 31 PROVIDE SURACE MOUNT ROUGH-IN JUNCTION BOX OR MECHANICAL SENSOR(S) AS NEEDED WITH CONDUIT ROUTED DOWN WALL IN OOD PREP ROOM POWER OR WATER SOTENER WS-1. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 33 TEMPORARY METER LOCATION, DEMOLISH ONCE THE GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM CLOSES OR CONSTRUCTION. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEET E5.1 OR DETAILS. 34 POWER OR TRAP PRIMERS, COORDINATE 120V CONNECTION AND LOCATION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. POWER NOTES (TYPICAL ALL POWER SHEETS) 1. MOUNT POWER RECEPTACLES DENOTED 'TV' AT THE SAME HEIGHT AND WITHIN 8" O ASSOCIATED LOW VOLTAGE TV OUTLET. 2. RECEPTACLES DENOTED 'R' OR 'ROO' SHALL BE MOUNTED TO A UNISTRUT RAME ON ROO, GCI-TYPE AND MOUNTED IN A WEATHERPROO BOX WITH WEATHERPROO IN-USE COVER A MINIMUM O 18" ABOVE ROO STRUCTURE. 3. SPECIAL RECEPTACLES: TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION, VERIY JUNCTION BOX AND WALL PLATE REQUIREMENTS OR SPECIALTY DEVICES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 4. VERIY OWNER'S PREERENCE OR PANEL DIRECTORIES. DIRECTORIES SHALL RELECT OWNER'S NUMBERING SCHEME AND NOT THE ARCHITECTURAL NUMBERING SCHEME. OBTAIN REQUIRED INPUT ROM OWNER PRIOR TO ABRICATION O TYPED PANEL DIRECTORIES. 5. PROVIDE MINIMUM O 24-INCHES SEPARATION BETWEEN BOXES LOCATED BACK-TO-BACK AT ALL IRE-RATED WALLS. 6. PROVIDE POWER ROM DESIGNATED 20A/1P BREAKER IN PANEL 1C TO EACH SMOKE DAMPER IN AREA. WIRE THRU IRE ALARM SYSTEM RELAYS. 7. SEE SCHEDULE SHEETS OR CONNECTIONS TO ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING DISCONNECTS & STARTERS PROVIDED BY DIVISION 26. COORDINATE MOUNTING O DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS WITH SURROUNDING EQUIPMENT AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED BY NEC. 8. SEE MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS TO CONIRM LOCATIONS O ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT, WATER HEATERS, PUMPS, EXHAUST ANS, DAMPERS, THERMOSTATS, HUMIDISTATS, SENSORS, CONTROL DEVICES, CONTROL PANELS, ETC SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE TR-101 CC-1 TR-102 CUH-101 1B B - 35 CHASE 124 STAIR 2S3 C:\Revit\ _EL_2016_mwurst.rvt 3/30/ :41:14 AM BENJAMIN TALPOS NORTH ATU-001 CC-1 1C SP-2 STORAGE C - 21 STAIR 0S1 POWER PLAN - BASEMENT LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" SP-3 1B STORAGE 002 1B - 76 ATU-002 STAIR 0S4 S CC-1 NORTH S S B-2 6 S ATU-102 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 STAIR 1S3 LOUNGE 105 S S 1A - 19 CC-1 CC-1 CORRIDOR 108 HD TS AV 25 1C S C O2 T T STORAGE 103 STAIR 1S2 M STORAGE 104 INV-1C INV-1D INV-1E 1C 1C - 17 B-2 STAIR 1S1 27 CUH-102 POWER PLAN - MAIN LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" S S B-1 B-1 RECEPTION HALL 109 RETAIL 101 1B TASTING ROOM 102 1B CC J J J B-1 1B- 29 1B- 4,6 1B- 31 1B B - 37 BAR A - 17 C O2 S AV TS MEN'S RESTROOM 112 E-2 J 1B B O2 C S C O2 S S S TV CONERENCE ROOM E6.1 HD TS AV PRIVATE TASTING 123 OOD PREP 120 MECH/ELEC/CUST 121 OICE A B - 1 1A - 13 Sim 10 A/V 111 1A-23,25,27,29,31,33 MECH/ELEC 114 CORRIDOR ELEVATORSP-1 1E1 1B- 23 1B- 25 O2 1 S C 8 25 TV S M S KEG COOLER 122 STAIR 1S4 1B INV-1B J STORAGE 117 1A- 7 CATERING STAGING 116 1A- 9 1A " TV INV-1A INV-1 1A 1A - 37 MDP ATU-104 1A - 15 B-4 1B - 21 ATU-101 1B DWH-1 1A- 3 90" 1A- 35 ATU-106 1A- 5 ATU-103 ATU-105 B B " E-3 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 TV 84" TV 1A A - 32 WS-1 32 CC-1 5 E2.1 NORTH J TV 96" TV 1C- 1 1C- 9 36" TS J J BAR 201 1C- 3 1C- 5,7 1C- 11 AV WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 ATU-201 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 E-1 J J 1C - 42 GALLERY CC-1 1C - 13 S C O2 S S CORRIDOR 205 HD TS AV 2A STAIR 2S1 11 S C O2 1C - 15 B-2 6 TR-201 B-2 TR-202 STAIR 2S2 POWER PLAN - UPPER LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" CC-1 SSOU-2 S S J SSIU-2 O2 C TV TV RECEPTION HALL 206 S 2A ELEVATOR LOBBY 212 B-4 B-2 2A - 27 CONERENCE ROOM 207 OUTDOOR SEATING 213 2A - 31 SSOU-1 2A - 33 RTU-2 HD TS AV 2A - 35 RTU-1 C O2 S STORAGE 208 WP 2 ELEVATOR 2E1 3 CATERING STAGING 210 V S 24 2A A - 23 INV-2A 2A S T ATU-205 ATU-202 R WP MECH/ELEC 209 ATU-204 R WP 24 WP 2A- 1,3,5 2A- 9 SSIU-1 2A - 7 2A- 13 2A- 15 2A- 17 2A- 19 ATU-203 2A - 25 ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211 E2.1 POWER PLANS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions AND ADDITION CC-1 3/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

128 S KEYED NOTES KEY VALUE KEY TEXT 1 PROVIDE 3/4" C. TO TELEPHONE DEMARCATION POINT IN ROOM 111 OR ELEVATOR EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS. 2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULES OR ELEVATOR RECALL. QUANTITY AS REQUIRED. 3 ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE OR ELEVATOR SHUNT TRIP AND ELEVATOR RECALL, QUANTITY AS REQUIRED. 4 COORDINATE QUANTITY O TAMPER AND LOW SWITCHES OR IRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. PROVIDE MONITOR MODULES AND CONNECT TO IRE ALARM SYSTEM PER SECTION MOUNT COMM OUTLET INSIDE O CABINET. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT AND GROMMET IN COUNTER. 6 ROUTE 1" C. ROM CASEWORK BELOW GRADE INTO BASEMENT AND UP WALL WITH SWEEP BENDS STUBBED OUT ABOVE CEILING IN RM 120. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE BUSHING ON BOTH ENDS. 7 PROVIDE SPD AT PIV ENTRANCE AND CONNECT TO IRE ALARM SYSTEM. 8 PROVIDE 2" SLEEVE AT 7'-10" WITH BUSHINGS ON BOTH SIDES TO EED TV CONNECTIONS. 9 PROVIDE RECESSED SINGLE-GANG BOX IN METAL PANEL OR SECURITY CAMERA WITH 3/4" CONDUIT TO A/V ROOM ROUGH-IN OR VIDEO WALL, COORDINATE WITH OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE (3) JUNCTION BOXES STACKED WITH 1-1/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN BOXES AND 1-1/4" C. ROUTED BACK TO A/V ROOM 111. APPROXIMATE BOX MOUNTING HEIGHTS: 52", 79", 106". KEYED NOTES KEY VALUE KEY TEXT 11 ROUGH-IN OR VIDEO WALL, COORDINATE WITH OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE (3) JUNCTION BOXES STACKED WITH 1-1/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN BOXES AND 1-1/4" C. ROUTED BACK TO A/V ROOM 111. APPROXIMATE BOX MOUNTING HEIGHTS: 60", 87", 114". 12 PROVIDE SURACE BOXES OR DEVICES THIS WALL WITH CONDUIT ROUTED THROUGH WALL BEHIND. 13 SURACE MOUNT SINGLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX OR OWNER PROVIDED SPEAKER AT 10'-0" ABOVE INISHED LOOR WITH 3/4" C ROUTED TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING IN GALLERY PROVIDE (2) 1" CONDUITS ROM LOOR BOX STUBBED OUT AT STRUCTURE OR ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING OR A/V CABLING. 15 (3) 2" C. TO A/V RM 111 BELOW. STUB CONDUITS 8 EET UP WALL IN STORAGE RM 208 AND DOWN INTO CEILING SPACE BELOW. 16 (3) 2" C. TO STORAGE ROOM ABOVE. 17 PROVIDE SURACE MOUNTED SINGLE-GANG BOX WITH 3/4" C. STUBBED INTO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE IN RECEPTION HALL 206 OR SECURITY CAMERA. 18 PROVIDE 2-GANG RECESSED BOX AT 48 INCHES OR COMM UTILITY ENTRANCE WITH 2" C TO A/V RM ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND BOXES THIS SPACE PRE-COLORED BLACK. SEE SPECIICATION. SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOTES (TYPICAL ALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS SHEETS) 1. S OR S - SMOKE OR IRE/SMOKE DAMPER SYMBOL. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO IRE ALARM SYSTEM. PROVIDE A RELAY AND DUCT DETECTOR WITH REMOTE INDICATOR LAMP AND TEST SWITCH OR ACTUATION O DAMPER. DETECTION AND ACTUATION SHALL BE COMPLIANT WITH IBC 2006 SECTION TYPICAL OR EACH DAMPER SHOWN. 2. PROVIDE RELAY(S) OR AN SHUTDOWN O COMMON DUCTED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AT EACH MECH UNIT. (REER TO HVAC PLANS OR EQUIPMENT LOCATION AND DUCTS). UNITS LISTED ON E7.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES. COORDINATE EORT WITH DIVISION 23. IRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL CONNECT DIRECTLY TO MECHANICAL UNITS SHOWN ON SCHEDULE AND SHUT-DOWN CORRESPONDING UNITS UPON ACTIVATION O COMMON DUCTED DETECTION AS SPECIIED. 3. OUTLETS OR TELECOM, IRE ALARM, SECURITY, ACCESS CONTROL, AND ALL OTHER LOW VOLTAGE CABLING: PROVIDE INSULATED BUSHINGS ON ALL CONDUIT STUB-UPS, INCLUDING UNUSED STUB-UPS OR STUB-UPS INDICATED OR UTURE USE. 4. SLEEVES: PROVIDE (2) 2" CONDUITS AT EACH SLEEVE LOCATION SHOWN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE BUSHINGS ON BOTH SIDES O ALL SLEEVES SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE P P 75 P 75 STORAGE 001 STAIR 0S1 M TS P 75 S 75 PIV 4 7 P STORAGE 002 P 30 P STAIR 0S4 S CC-1 S S S WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 J J STAIR 1S3 75 S S LOUNGE CC-1 CORRIDOR 108 P P 15 D STORAGE 103 STAIR 1S1 P P P AA STORAGE S S D P P D TASTING ROOM J J J RETAIL BAR AV TS 6 J S TV 42" 15 P PRIVATE TASTING OOD PREP 120 V ELEVATOR 1E E6.1 P E6.1 KEG COOLER 122 STAIR 1S4 S ACP J MECH/ELEC/CUST 121 CC-1 STORAGE E6.1 CATERING STAGING 116 Sim CHASE 124 Sim Sim TV J TV TS J J BAR 201 AV WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 STAIR 2S3 J J S D P 19 P S 75 CORRIDOR 205 GALLERY 202 STAIR 2S1 15 P WP S S J ELEVATOR LOBBY 212 OUTDOOR SEATING 213 P WP 110 ELEVATOR 2E1 P V 30 P ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211 CATERING STAGING 210 M R E3.1 SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 3/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION RECEPTION HALL 109 RECEPTION HALL RTU-2 SUPPLY C:\Revit\ _EL_2016_mwurst.rvt 3/30/ :41:16 AM BENJAMIN TALPOS NORTH SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - BASEMENT LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH HD TS AV SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - MAIN LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0". STAIR 1S2 M P J P 24 E6.1 A/V 111 MEN'S RESTROOM E6.1 Sim Sim E HD TS AV 16. Sim CORRIDOR CONERENCE ROOM 115 TV 15 MECH/ELEC 114 J P WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 M NORTH STAIR 2S2 HD TS AV SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - UPPER LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0". 110 P 15 TV CONERENCE ROOM HD TS AV 15. P 30 P D P RTU-1 SUPPLY P D STORAGE 208 MECH/ELEC 209 Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

129 EEDER SIZING NOTES: 1. EEDERS SHALL BE 4 WIRE (4W), ABCNG, UNLESS DENOTED WITH: "3W" WHICH SHALL BE 3 WIRE (3W), ABCG "K" WHICH SHALL BE 4 WIRE, ABCNG, WITH OVERSIZED NEUTRAL 2. ALL EEDERS HAVE EQUIPMENT GROUND. 3. NOT ALL SIZES USED. 4. CONDUITS INDICATED USE WORST CASE OR EMT, IMC, RMC, RNC-40, MC, LMC. 5. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS BASED ON AA-8000 SERIES ALLOY, COMPACT STRANDED CONDUCTORS, NEC TABLES AND 5A. 225 M EXISTING POLE MOUNTED UTILITY TRANSORMER RELOCATE EXISTING OVERHEAD EED, MAINTAIN REQUIRED CLEARANCES. RELOCATE EXISTING METER TO BACK O NEW BUILDING TEMPORARILY. SEE POWER PLANS OR LOCATION. PROVIDE A NEMA 3R, 400A DISCONNECT, USED AT 225 AMPS MOUNTED ADJACENT TO METER TO EED THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL. ROUTE NEW EED TO EXISTING PANEL UNDERGROUND. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH CONSTRUCTION. ENGINEER'S NOTES: 1. ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO THE EXISTING GLACIAL TILL BUILDING WILL BE COMPLETELY DEMOLISHED, BUT TEMPORARY SERCIE WILL NEED TO BE MAINTAINED TO THE ELECTRICAL PANEL UNTIL THE TASTING ROOM CLOSES OR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DIAGRAM ESTABLISHES A TEMPORARY UTILITY CONNECTION TO MAINTAIN POWER TO THE TASTING ROOM WHILE THE REMAINDER O THE CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETED. 2. COORDINATE ALL UTILITY WORK WITH OPPD. 3. INSTALLATION TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS O THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND THE AHJ. 4. COORDINATE ANY POWER OUTAGE WITH THE OWNER. 3ø EEDER SCHEDULE - Al MARK EEDER 4W EEDER 3W EEDER K (AMPACITY) # SETS ø & N GND C # SETS ø GND C # SETS ø #N / SET N GND C /0 6 2" 1 1/0 6 1½" 1 1/ " /0 4 2" 1 1/0 4 1½" 1 2/ " /0 4 2" 1 2/0 4 2" 1 3/ ½" /0 4 2" 1 3/0 4 2" 1 4/ ½" /0 4 2½" 1 4/0 4 2" /0 3 3" ½" ½" " " ½" /0 3½" " ½" /0 3½" ½" " " ½" ½" /0 3" /0 3" /0 2½" /0 3½" /0 3½" /0 3" /0 4" 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE /0 3" /0 3" /0 3½" EXISTING GLACIAL TILL ELECTRICAL PANEL 120/240V, 1 PHASE DEMOLISH, ONLY ATER THE TASTING ROOM CLOSES OR REMODEL /0 3½" /0 3½" ½" ½" " " DEMOLITION/TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ONE-LINE DIAGRAM 600 M 600/3 SPD MECH/ELEC ROOM 114 NEW POLE MOUNTED TRANSORMERS (3) 75 KVA BY OPPD ONE-LINE DIAGRAM PROVIDE SERVICE CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT TO OPPD PEDESTAL AT BASE O NEW TRANSORMER POLE. METER AND CTS PROVIDED BY OPPD, INSTALL AND PROVIDE CABINET AND MOUNT ON BACK O BUILDING AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL "MDP" 120/208V 600A, 3PH, 4W SCCR = 32 KA MDP 150/3 150 PANEL 1A 400/3 400 PANEL 1B CC-1 150/3 150 PANEL 1C ENGINEER'S NOTES: 1. ESTIMATED MAXIMUM DEMAND: 215 KVA, 594A 2. SERVICE EEDER IS BASED ON A 600 A DISCONNECT 3. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING IS BASED ON (3) 75KVA SERVICE TRANSORMERS WITH 1.8 %Z 4. COORDINATE ALL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION WITH OPPD. 150/3 150 PANEL 2A CC-1 125/3 RTU-1 LA = 101 A SCCR = 24 KA 125/3 RTU-2 LA = 99 A SCCR = 20 KA SPACE OR (2) 225A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKERS SEE CONNECTION SCHEDULES SHEET E7.2 OR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INORMATION. E5.1 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE & GROUNDING DIAGRAM /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 3/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION NEUTRAL GROUND 1/0 SBJ C:\Revit\ _EL_2016_mwurst.rvt 3/30/ :41:16 AM BENJAMIN TALPOS GROUNDING DIAGRAM GROUND BAR #3/0 BJ TO BLDG STEEL #3/0 GEC TO WATER ENTRANCE #4 GEC TO CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE #6 GEC TO DEEP DRIVEN GROUND ROD IN TEST WELL Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

130 CC-1 PANEL: 1A LOCATION: MECH/ELEC 114 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURACE BUS RATING: 150 A PHASES: 3 ED ROM: SEE ONE-LINE MAIN BREAKER: 150 A WIRES: 4 SCCR: 27 KA PANEL: 2A LOCATION: MECH/ELEC 209 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURACE BUS RATING: 150 A PHASES: 3 ED ROM: SEE ONE-LINE MAIN BREAKER: 150 A WIRES: 4 SCCR: 23 KA NOTES: (G) PROVIDE GCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. NOTES: (G) PROVIDE GCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION BKR TRIP POLES A B C BKR POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT 1 RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 244 VA 1 20 A INV-1A, RECEPT - CATERING RM 116, ICE MAKER 20 A VA 1272 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL SOUTH 4 5 RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 492 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL RECEPTION 6 7 RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 1833 VA 3 20 A ATU RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 1833 VA RECEPT - CON RM A VA 1833 VA RECEPT - CON RM A VA 1833 VA 3 20 A ATU RECEPT - RESTROOMS 112,113, A VA 1833 VA RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 1833 VA RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 2000 VA 1 25 A ATU RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 2000 VA 1 25 A ATU RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 2760 VA 3 30 A CUH RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 2760 VA RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 2760 VA RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 160 VA 1 15 A E-2, E RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A WS RECEPT - A/V RM A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE (G) ICE MAKER - CATERING RM A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE RECEPT - MECH CONTROLS RM A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 42 TOTAL LOAD: VA VA VA TOTAL AMPS: 108 A 120 A 97 A CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION BKR TRIP POLES A B C BKR POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT 1 ELEVATOR 30 A VA 524 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL SOUTH VA 514 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL RECEPTION VA 940 VA 2 15 A SSOU-1, SSIU RECEPT - ELEV MACH RM A VA 940 VA LTG - ELEV CAB 15 A VA 940 VA 2 15 A SSOU-2, SSIU LTG - ELEV MACH ROOM A 1 62 VA 940 VA RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 2500 VA 3 30 A ATU RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 2500 VA RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 2500 VA RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 2500 VA 3 30 A ATU RECEPT - CATERING RM A VA 2500 VA RECEPT - MECH A VA 2500 VA RECEPT - STORAGE RM A VA 1167 VA 3 15 A ATU RECEPT - CON RM A VA 1167 VA RECEPT - CON RM A VA 1167 VA RECEPT - PATIO RM A VA 1000 VA 3 15 A ATU RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 1000 VA RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 1000 VA RECEPT - RECEPTION RM A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE INV-2A 20 A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 42 TOTAL LOAD: VA VA VA TOTAL AMPS: 116 A 116 A 117 A 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE LOAD CLASSIICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND ACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS Lighting 2020 VA % 2525 VA Receptacle VA 89.56% VA CONNECTED LOAD: VA Appliance 500 VA 85.00% 425 VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: VA HVAC VA % VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 107 A EMD CURRENT: 105 A LOAD CLASSIICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND ACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS Lighting 1829 VA % 2286 VA Receptacle 8480 VA % 8480 VA CONNECTED LOAD: VA HVAC VA % VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: VA Motor 6300 VA 97.94% 6170 VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 116 A EMD CURRENT: 117 A PANEL: 1B LOCATION: CUSTODIAL 121 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURACE BUS RATING: 400 A PHASES: 3 ED ROM: SEE ONE-LINE MAIN BREAKER: 400 WIRES: 4 SCCR: 15 KA PANEL: 1C LOCATION: STORAGE 103 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURACE BUS RATING: 150 A PHASES: 3 ED ROM: SEE ONE-LINE MAIN BREAKER: 150 A WIRES: 4 SCCR: 7 KA NOTES: PANEL TO BE SINGLE SECTION, (G) PROVIDE GCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION BKR TRIP POLES A B C BKR POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT 1 RECEPT - TASTING RM A VA 51 VA 1 20 A LTG - ELEVATOR PIT 2 3 RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 3330 VA 2 40 A DISHWASHER - BAR RM RECEPT - OOD PREP, MEAT SLICER 20 A VA 3330 VA RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 3330 VA 2 40 A DISHWASHER - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 3330 VA RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 96 VA 1 20 A INV-1B RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 1878 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR (G) RECEPT - REEZER RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A LTG - TRACK RETAIL (G) RECEPT - RERIGERATOR RM A VA 850 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR TRACK RECEPT - BASEMENT STORAGE A VA 1200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR TRACK RECEPT - MECH RM A VA 1200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR PENDANTS RECEPT - ELEV PIT 20 A VA 1050 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR PENDANTS RECEPT - ELEV SUMP PUMP 20 A VA 372 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR COUNTER RECEPT - BAR A VA 180 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - RETAIL RM (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR A VA 180 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - CEILING TV (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR A VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - TV BAR RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - RETAIL RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - LOOR RETAIL RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - LOOR TASTING RM A VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - OOD PREP RM RECEPT - TASTING RM A VA 1500 VA 1 20 A ATU EVAPORATOR COIL - KEG COOKER RM A VA 3333 VA 3 35 A ATU CONDENSER - KEG COOLER RM A VA 3333 VA VA 3333 VA BEVERAGE COOLING SYSTEM 25 A VA 1333 VA 3 15 A ATU DWH-1 15 A VA 1333 VA (G) INDUCTION COOKTOP 20 A VA 1333 VA VA 1333 VA 3 15 A ATU RECEPT - OOD PREP RM A VA 1333 VA RECEPT - OICE A VA 1333 VA ACP 20 A VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1176 VA 1 20 A SP SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA 3 15 A CUH SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 30 VA 1 20 A TRAP PRIMERS - BAR TOTAL LOAD: VA VA VA TOTAL AMPS: 200 A 202 A 185 A LOAD CLASSIICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND ACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS Lighting 7213 VA % 9016 VA Receptacle 5220 VA % 5220 VA CONNECTED LOAD: VA Appliance VA 85.00% VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: VA HVAC VA % VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 194 A Motor 2352 VA % 2352 VA EMD CURRENT: 186 A NOTES: (G) PROVIDE GCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION BKR TRIP POLES A B C BKR POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT 1 RECEPT - TV BAR RM A VA 176 VA 1 20 A INV-1C, 1D, 1E 2 3 (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR A VA 1144 VA 1 20 A LTG - BASEMENT 001, STAIR S1 4 5 (G) DISHWASHER - BAR RM A VA 1312 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL GALLERY VA 1500 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL BAR PENDANTS 8 9 (G) RECEPT - BAR 201 BEER DISPENSER 20 A VA 959 VA 1 20 A LTG - IRST LEVEL LOUNGE (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR A VA 500 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL LOUNGE 105 TRACK RECEPT - GALLERY RM 202, 203, A VA 200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL BAR COUNTER RECEPT - GALLERY RM A VA 200 VA 1 20 A LTG - ESTOON LTG PATIO RECEPT - RESTROOMS 106,107,108,1S1 20 A VA 1167 VA 3 15 A ATU RECEPT - LOUNGE A VA 1167 VA RECEPT - STORAGE A VA 1167 VA ATU A VA 2333 VA 3 25 A ATU VA 2333 VA VA 2333 VA SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A TR SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A TR SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A TR SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A TR SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1176 VA 1 20 A SP SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 528 VA 1 15 A E SMOKE DAMPERS 20 A 1 0 VA 20 VA 1 20 A TRAP PRIMERS - BAR TOTAL LOAD: VA VA VA TOTAL AMPS: 143 A 113 A 138 A LOAD CLASSIICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND ACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS Lighting 5996 VA % 7495 VA Receptacle 4140 VA % 4140 VA CONNECTED LOAD: VA Appliance 8220 VA 85.00% 6987 VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: VA HVAC VA % VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 129 A Motor 1176 VA % 1176 VA EMD CURRENT: 130 A MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE MARK NO. VOLTAGE POLES HP VA/PHASE CB SIZE DISCONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT P/N - G - C PANEL CIRCUIT NOTES CUH V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1B 78,80,82 CUH V VA 30 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 24,26,28 DWH V VA 15 A CIRCUIT BREAKER /4" 1B 51 E V 1 1/6 528 VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1C 40 E V 1-80 VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 30 1,2 E V 1-80 VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 30 1,2 TR V VA 20 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 1C 30 6 TR V VA 20 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 1C 32 6 TR V VA 20 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 1C 34 6 TR V VA 20 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 1C 36 6 SSIU V 2-0 VA 15 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 2A 6,8 3,4 SSIU V 2-0 VA 15 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE /4" 2A 10,12 3,4 SSOU V VA 15 A 30A/3P NON USED NEMA 3R /4" 2A 6,8 3,4,5 SSOU V VA 15 A 30A/3P NON USED NEMA 3R /4" 2A 10,12 3,4,5 E7.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 3/30/18 ADDENDUM CC-1 AND ADDITION MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. PROVIDE RELAY TO INTERLOCK AN WITH LIGHT SWITCH. 2. AN PROVIDED WITH SPEED CONTROLLER SHIPPED LOOSE OR IELD WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. INDOOR UNIT POWERED ROM OUTDOOR UNIT. PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT AT EACH UNIT. 4. PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN SSIU AND SSOU WITH PULL STRING OR CONTROL WIRING. 5. MOUNT DISCONNECT TO UNISTRUT RAME ON ROO. 6. PROVIDE TOGGLE SWITCH OR LOCAL DISCONNECTING MEANS. COORDINATE WITH BASE BOARD HEATER CONSTRUCTION, CONCEAL AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE. PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE C:\Revit\ _EL_2016_mwurst.rvt 3/30/ :41:16 AM BENJAMIN TALPOS MARK NO. VOLTAGE POLES VA/PHASE CB SIZE DISCONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT P/N - G - C PANEL CIRCUIT NOTES RTU V VA 125 A BY DIVISION 23 1/ " MDP 2,4,6 RTU V VA 125 A BY DIVISION 23 1/ " MDP 8,10,12 TERMINAL BOX ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE MARK NO. SERVED ROM VOLTAGE POLES KW VA/PHASE MOCP DISCONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT P/N - G - C PANEL CIRCUIT NOTES ATU-001 RTU V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1C 18,20,22 1 ATU-002 RTU V VA 20 A BY DIVISION /4" 1B 42 1 ATU-101 RTU V VA 35 A BY DIVISION /4" 1B 44,46,48 1 ATU-102 RTU V VA 25 A BY DIVISION /4" 1C 24,26,28 1 ATU-103 RTU V VA 20 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 14,16,18 1 ATU-104 RTU V VA 20 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 8,10,12 1 ATU-105 RTU V VA 25 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 20 1 ATU-106 RTU V VA 25 A BY DIVISION /4" 1A 22 1 ATU-107 RTU V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1B 50,52,54 1 ATU-108 RTU V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 1B 56,58,60 1 ATU-201 RTU V VA 40 A BY DIVISION /4" 1C 23,25,27 1 ATU-202 RTU V VA 30 A BY DIVISION /4" 2A 14,16,18 1 ATU-203 RTU V VA 30 A BY DIVISION /4" 2A 20,22,24 1 ATU-204 RTU V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 2A 26,28,30 1 ATU-205 RTU V VA 15 A BY DIVISION /4" 2A 32,34,36 1 TERMINAL BOX SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. PROVIDE IRE ALARM RELAY(S) OR SHUTDOWN O COMMON-DUCTED UNITS. REER TO "SERVED ROM" COLUMN OR GROUPING O HEAT PUMPS. Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

131 CONTRACTOR VERIY WALL SUPPORT AT LANDING. I REQUIRED, PROVIDE DOUBLE 2x8 HEADER AND 4x4 COLUMN. DOUBLE UP 2 NEAREST LOOR JOISTS OR SUPPORT O COLUMN AND PROVIDE DOUBLE JOIST HEADER UNDER COLUMN. WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 HELICAL PIER 50K CAPACITY WORKING LOAD (TYP UNO) 21 S3.2 10' - 8" TYP THIS WALL 2' - 0" 6' - 10" 6' - 10" 8' - 0" C6B 5' - 0" 2' - 0" 3B 2' - 4" 26 S3.2 TO 91' - 4" TO 91' - 4" TO 98' - 8" A STAIR 1S3 UP STORAGE 103 LOUNGE 105 CORRIDOR 108 STORAGE 104 UP STAIR 1S1 4" CONC SLAB-ON-GRADE WITH 6"x6" - W2.1xW2.1 WW OVER VAPOR BARRIER ON 4" GRANULAR ILL TYP INISH LOOR EL = 100'-0" 12 S3.1 A.1 TOMP 98' - 8" 2' - 0" 3A UP A.5 B 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0" PC1A TOMP 98' - 8" C4A 25 S3.1 C8A TYP 8' - 9" TYP THIS WALL VESTIBULE 100 TASTING ROOM 102 RECEPTION HALL TYP STAIR S3.1 1S S3.1 STOOP C6D C6D TOGB 99' - 4" C6D C6D C6D C6D 2' - 6" STOOP PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1 2' - 6" S TYP PC3A S3.1 SIM 1'-4"x1'-4" GRADE BEAM WITH 2-#6 T&B W/ #3 CLOSED 4'-0" OC CC-1 PC3 PC3 PC3 PC3 21D TOPC 99' - 4" (TYP UNO) RETAIL 101 S3.1 TYP C6A PC4 46 S3.1 C8B C6C C6C 33 S3.1 2' - 0" BAR 119 TOGB 97' - 8" C6C C6C TOPC 98' - 8" C6B TOPC 98' - 8" PC5 A/V /4" 6 3/4" TOGB 97' - 8" TOGB 97' - 8" TOGB 97' - 8" TOGB 97' - 8" TOGB 98' - 0" TOGB 98' - 0" TYP PC4 MEN'S RESTROOM S3.2 RE. RE. C6B 3A TOPC 98' - 8" C4A CORRIDOR 110 TO 98' - 8" 4" CONC SLAB-ON-GRADE WITH 6"x6" - W2.1xW2.1 WW OVER VAPOR BARRIER ON 4" GRANULAR ILL INISH LOOR EL = 92'-4" TO 92' - 0" TO 92' - 0" TYP 36 S3.1 OOD PREP 120 TO 92' - 0" 3A TO 92' - 0" OICE S3.2 PC4 ELEVATOR 1E1 TO 92' - 0" PRIVATE TASTING 123 TOGB 92' - 0" C6B TO 98' - 8" 1'-4"x1'-4" GRADE BEAM WITH 2-#6 T&B W/ #3 CLOSED 4'-0" OC 3B CATERING STAGING 116 STORAGE 117 CONERENCE ROOM 115 MECH/ELEC 114 KEG COOLER 122 STAIR 1' - 0 3/4" TYP 1S4 6' - 8" MECH/ELEC/CUST S3.2 S3.1 8' - 0" TYP 21C S3.1 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 3A 3A TO 92' - 0" TOGB 92' - 0" TOGB 99' - 4" TOGB 92' - 0" ICE 3A 7' - 8 1/2" TYP C 1' - 4" TYP 5' - 0" TOMP 98' - 0" 7' - 0" 5' - 2" TO 92' - 0" 3A TO 92' - 0" 2' - 0" CHASE 124 TOMP 98' - 0" 3B 3B TOMP 98' - 0" TOMP 98' - 0" TO 92' - 0" BOT TG STEP TO 98' - 8" UP TO 98' - 8" 11 9' - 5" TYP THIS WALL C8A C6B C6B S3.1 TYP 1' - 3" 14' - 0" 2' - 6" 10' - 5" 12' - 9" 13' - 3" 11' - 6" 8' - 3" 20' - 0" CONTRACTOR VERIY OUNDATION SUPPORT ALONG EXISTING WALL DURING EXCAVATION OR NEW OOTINGS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCE SHALL EXISTING WALL OOTING BE UNDERMINED CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH ELEVATOR MANUACTURER WHICH CMU CELLS TO GROUT OR ELEVATOR RAIL SUPPORT 8 A A.1 2' - 4" OC (EXISTING) 36 S6.1 TYP STORAGE 001 STAIR 0S1 UP A.5 B 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0" 43 S6.1 1'-4" OC 2x12 (EXISTING) OC STORAGE 002 W8x24 (V) TOS 98' - 3 3/4" (V) TOS 98' - 3 3/4" 36 S S5.1 3/4" PLYWOOD STAIR 0S4 C DOUBLE UP STAIR HEADER AND JOISTS SOUTH O STAIR REMOVE EXISTING TIMBER BEAM AND COLUMNS AND REPLACE WITH LOAD BEARING 2x6 WALL ON 1'-0"x1'-0" THICKENED SLAB BETWEEN MASONRY PIERS. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SUPPORT O EXISTING LOOR JOIST DURING REPLACEMENT. 14' - 0" 2' - 6" 10' - 5" 12' - 9" 13' - 3" 11' - 6" 8' - 3" 20' - 0" 1' - 3" SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE OUNDATION AND LOWER LEVEL RAMING PLANS S /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions AND ADDITION CC-1 3/30/18 C:\Revit\ _ST_2016_jbergren.rvt 3/30/2018 1:09:30 PM NORTH VERT MAS WALL REIN 1- 1'-4" OC OUNDATION PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 7' - 7" TYP THIS WALL D 8' - 6" TYP THIS WALL 11' - 0" 2' - 9" E 5' - 7" G 31 S3.1 TYP 14 S3.1 TYP EDGE STIENER 2-#5 IN 1 CELL GROUT 2 CELLS (TYP UNO) GRADE BEAM 3'-2" DEEP (TYP) NORTH MAIN LEVEL RAMING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D 11' - 0" 2' - 9" 5' - 7" E G Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

132 A 2' - 4" A.1 A.5 B 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0" C A A.1 A.5 B 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0" C 1419 SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE S S S6.1 2' - 4" HSS6x6x1/4 TUBE RAMING TYP TYP 54 S5.1 EXISTING JOISTS AT THIS ROO ARE ASSUMED TO BE 2x12 JOISTS SPACED AT 12" OC. CONTRACTOR TO IELD VERIY. I JOISTS ARE SMALLER THAN 2x12 AND/OR ARE SPACED ARTHER APART THAN 12" OC THEY SHALL BE REINORCED WITH AN ADDITIONAL JOIST AT EACH EXISTING JOIST. OR OTHER JOIST CONIGURATIONS CONTACT THE ARCHITECT. CONTRACTOR VERIY WALL SUPPORT AT LANDING. I REQUIRED, PROVIDE DOUBLE 2x8 HEADER AND 4x4 COLUMN. DOUBLE UP 2 NEAREST LOOR JOISTS OR SUPPORT O COLUMN AND PROVIDE DOUBLE JOIST HEADER UNDER OC WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 MEN'S RESTROOM 107 BRG PLATE 3/4x9x0'-7" 2x12 (EXISTING) BRG PLATE 1x16x0'-7" TYP STAIR DELEGATED DESIGN BY SUPPLIER 12 S S6.1 (113'-1 1/2") 26 S5.1 STAIR 1S3 UP STORAGE 103 LOUNGE 105 CORRIDOR 108 W16x45 TOS 111' - 10" STORAGE 104 UP W24x94 STAIR 1S1 TOS 111' - 10" (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL UP STAIR 1S2 W8x18 W18x35 VESTIBULE TOS 110' - 4 3/4" 100 TOS 111' - 10" TASTING ROOM 102 1/2" PLYWOOD ON 2x6 T&G DECKING (TYP UNO) RECEPTION HALL 109 W18x35 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" W18x35 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" W18x35 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" W18x35 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" S6.1 W21x44 TOS 111' - 10" W16x31 BOL 109' - 4" W16x36 TOS 111' - 10" RETAIL 101 3x12 3x12 3x12 OC BAR OC 1 3/4x14 16" OC W18x46 TOS 111' - 10" /4x14 16" OC 1/2" PLYWOOD ON 2x6 T&G DECKING (TYP UNO) 24 BRG PLATE S5.1 1/2x7x0'-9" (113'-1 1/2") W8x18 (113'-1 1/2") S6.1 TYP S6.1 TYP W16x31 (V) TOS 112' - 0 3/4" 2x12 SIMPSON WMU3.56x HANGER WITH TOP LANGE CAST INTO CMU AT EACH END O STAIR BEAM. INSTALL PER MANUACTURER'S OC (EXISTING) 33 S5.1 TYP W16x31 TOS 112' - 0 3/4" (V) TYP 34 S5.1 (113'-1 1/2") TYP 23 S6.1 BOL 107' - 4" TYP 12 S5.1 TYP 21 S S6.1 TYP 44 TYP S5.1 TYP 1 3/4x14 LVL S5.1 TYP A/V TYP /4x14 16" OC MEN'S RESTROOM S5.1 TYP SPACE JOISTS TO AVOID COLUMNS, TYP S6.1 S5.1 TYP 44 OC CORRIDOR 110 OOD PREP 120 W14x22 W14x22 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL OICE 118 ML3 T-PL BOLTED 11' - 0" 2' - 9" 5' - 7" 51 S S6.1 S5.1 (111'-7") ELEVATOR 1E1 W14x22 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" PRIVATE TASTING 123 W14x22 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" TOS 110' - 4 3/4" TYP TYP W14x22 CATERING STAGING 116 STORAGE 117 CONERENCE ROOM 115 W16x36 TOS 111' MECH/ELEC - 10" 114 KEG COOLER 122 STAIR 1S4 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" MECH/ELEC/CUST S6.1 (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL W16x36 TOS 111' - 10" (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL 52 S6.1 W14x22 TOS 110' - 4 3/4" W14x22 56 S5.1 TOS 111' - 10" (111'-7") WOMEN'S RESTROOM 113 (113'-1 1/2") 19' - 9" 34 S6.1 CHASE 124 SIMPSON HU410 HANGER TO DOUBLE LVL W8x24 MECH DUCT TOS EL = 110'-8" UP BRG PLATE 3/4x7x0'-7" (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL 14' - 0" 2' - 6" 10' - 5" 12' - 9" 13' - 3" 11' - 6" 8' - 3" 20' - 0" 1' - 3" TYP 12 S6.1 BAR 201 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 203 MEN'S RESTROOM 204 (124'-5") 26 (124'-5") (124'-5") 33 S6.1 S5.1 TYP UP CORRIDOR 205 W14x22 TOS 124' - 3 1/2" 1/2" PLYWOOD ON 2x6 T&G DECKING (TYP UNO) 21 S6.1 TYP 25 S6.1 STAIR 2S3 GALLERY 202 TYP STAIR 2S1 W18x35 UP UP TOS 124' - 3 1/2" 26 S6.1 W8x18 TOS 124' - 1 1/2" (124'-5") ML2 STAIR 2S2 51 S6.1 (124'-5") 53 S5.1 CC-1 RECEPTION HALL 206 OC OC ML2 T-PL 18' - 3 1/8" OC W14x22 TOS 124' - 3 1/2" ML3 CONERENCE ROOM 207 ML2 T-PL OC 51 S5.1 TYP DOUBLE UP 2x12 JOISTS WHERE SHOWN UNDER ROO TOP MECH UNIT 26 S6.1 HSS6x3x1/4 TYP 55 S5.1 W16x45 BOL 121' - 3 1/2" TYP 33 S5.1 DRAG STRUT (124'-5") ML2 T-PL OUTDOOR SEATING ELEVATOR LOBBY S5.1 TYP 212 MECH UNIT 5200# W14x22 TOS 124' - 3 1/2" W18x35 TOS 124' - 3 1/2" 1 3/4X11 1/4 LVL DRAG STRUT 1 3/4X11 1/4 LVL 31 ELEVATOR 2E1 W8x18 1 3/4X11 1/4 LVL HSS6x3x1/4 21 S6.1 STORAGE 208 CATERING STAGING 210 MECH/ELEC /4X11 1/4 LVL (124'-5") S5.1 TYP W14x22 TOS 124' - 3 1/2" MECH UNIT 5000# (124'-5") 19' - 9" CC-1 UP 53 S6.1 HOIST BEAM, IELD LOCATE 14' - 0" 2' - 6" 10' - 5" 12' - 9" 13' - 3" 11' - 6" 1' - 3" ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211 8' - 3" 20' - 0" USE SIMPSON LBV1.8/11.25 HANGERS OR LVL's AT RTU OPENINGS S2.1 UPPER LEVEL AND ROO RAMING PLANS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 3/30/18 AND ADDITION C:\Revit\ _ST_2016_jbergren.rvt 3/30/2018 1:09:31 PM NORTH UPPER LEVEL RAMING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D E G NORTH UPPER ROO RAMING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" D 11' - 0" E CC-1 Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION

133 1' - 4" TOP O LEDGER EL SEE PLAN #4 EXTENTS O ELEVATOR WALL GROUT MINIMUM 8" ABOVE AND BELOW ANCHOR BOLTS BOND BEAM CMU WALL 11 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE SIMPSON LTT19 TIE W/ 1/2" Ø TITEN HD SCREW ANCHOR AT EXTENTS O ELEVATOR WALL TOP O LEDGER EL SEE PLAN EQ EQ EQ NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS HEADED ANCHORBOLTS AND WASHERS WITH MINIMUM 6" EMBEDMENT, SEE SCHEDULE (DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS) LOOR / ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON PA18 STRAP WITH 6" MIN EXTENTS O ELEVATOR WALL WOOD JOISTS, SEE PLAN JOIST HANGER, SEE SCHEDULE LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE, SPECIES AND GRADE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD LEDGER & MASONRY (AT MASONRY WALL) NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS HEADED ANCHORBOLTS AND WASHERS WITH MINIMUM 6" EMBEDMENT, SEE SCHEDULE (DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS) LOOR / ROO SHEATHING TOP O LEDGER EL SEE PLAN GROUT MIN 8" ABOVE AND BELOW ANCHOR BOLTS BOND BEAM CMU WALL 12 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE EQ EQ LOOR/ROO JOISTS PER PLAN DOUBLE HEADER MATCHING JOISTS PER PLAN NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS LOOR / ROO SHEATHING WOOD JOISTS SEE PLANS 2x 1'-4" OC 3/4"Ø HEADED ANCHORBOLTS AND 2'-8" OC WITH MINIMUM 6" EMBEDMENT (DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS) LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE, SPECIES AND GRADE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD LEDGER & MASONRY (AT MASONRY WALL) WALL 13 TYP DIAPHRAGM NAILING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE SIMPSON A34 EACH SIDE STAGGERRED LOOR JOISTS OR ROO TRUSSES PLYWOOD: ACE GRAIN TO RUN AT 90 TO JOISTS IELD NAILING EDGE NAILING NOTES: 1. ALL PLYWOOD SHEETS TO BE 4'-0"X8'-0" EXCEPT WHERE JOB CONDITIONS PROHIBIT. MINIMUM DIMENSION O ANY PIECE O PLYWOOD SHALL BE 24". 2. NAILING PER SCHEDULE. 3. SHEATHING PER SCHEDULE. 4. LONG DIMESION O PLYWOOD SHALL RUN ACROSS JOISTS OR RATERS. 5. NAILS SHALL HAVE A MIN. 3/8" EDGE DISTANCE & SHALL NOT BE OVER-DRIVEN THROUGH OUTER ACE. 2x BLOCKING LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON A34 EACH BLOCK END O OPPOSITE LOOR OR ROO JOIST LOCATION ROO LOOR DESCRIPTION MATERIAL 1/2" SHEATHING 1/2" SHEATHING BLOCKED 14 DIAPHRAGM SCHEDULE S6.1 NO SCALE SIMPSON H2.5A EACH SIDE STAGGERRED NO NO GLUED NO NO NAILING REQUIREMENTS SIZE PANEL EDGE 16d 6" 16d 6" 2x BLOCKING LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON A34 EACH BLOCK END O OPPOSITE LOOR OR ROO JOIST MINIMUM NAIL REQUIREMENTS PENNY WEIGHT 6d 2 8d 10d 16d 20d LENGTH (IN) 2 1/ /2 4 COMMON WIRE NAIL DIAMETER (IN) BOX WIRE NAIL DIAMETER (IN) LENGTH(I N) /4 SINKER DIAMETER (IN) NAILING SCHEDULE REMARKS: 1. COMMON OR BOX NAILS MAY BE USED EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE STATED. 2. NAILS SPACED AT 6 INCHES (152mm) ON CENTER AT EDGES, 12 INCHES (305mm) AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS EXCEPT 6 INCHES (152mm) AT ALL SUPPORTS WHERE SPANS ARE 48 INCHES (1219mm) OR MORE. OR NAILING O WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL AND PARTICLE BOARD DIAPHRAGMS AND SHEAR WALLS, REER TO GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES. NAILS OR WALL SHEATHING MAY BE COMMON, OR BOX. 3. SINKER. 4. COMMON. 5. DEORMED SHANK 6. CORROSION-RESISTANT SIDING (6d-1 7/8"x0.106"; 8d-2 3/8"x0.128") OR CASING (6d-2"x0.099"; 8d-2 1/2"x0.113") NAILS. 15 NAILING SCHEDULE S6.1 NO SCALE - 2x8 TOP PLATE LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING TOS EL SEE PLANS CONNECTION NAILING SCHEDULE 1. JOIST TO SILL OR GIRDER, TOE NAIL 2. BRIDGING TO JOIST, TOE NAIL EACH END 3. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, TYPICAL ACE NAIL SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, AT BRACED WALL PANELS 4. TOP PLATE TO STUD, END NAIL 5. STUD TO SOLE PLATE 6. DOUBLE STUDS, ACE NAIL 7. DOUBLE TOP PLATES, TYPICAL ACE NAIL DOUBLE TOP PLATES, LAP SPLICE 8. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RATERS TO TOP PLATE, TOE NAIL 9. RIM JOIST TO TOP PLATE, TOE NAIL 10. TOP PLATES, LAPS AND INTERSECTIONS, ACE NAIL 11. CONTINUOUS HEADER, TWO PIECES 12. CEILING JOISTS TO PLATE, TOE NAIL 13. CONTINUOUS HEADER TO STUD, TOE NAIL 14. CEILING JOISTS, LAPS OVER PARTITIONS, ACE NAIL 15. CEILING JOISTS TO PARALLEL RATERS, ACE NAIL 16. RATER TO PLATE, TOE NAIL 17. 1" (25mm) BRACE TO EACH STUD AND PLATE, ACE NAIL 18. BUILT-UP CORNER STUDS 19. BUILT-UP GIRDER AND BEAMS 20. 2" (51mm) PLANKS 21. WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS AND COMBINATION SUB-LOOR UNDERLAYMENT (TO RAMING), SUBLOOR AND WALL SHEATHING (TO RAMING): 5/8" AND LESS 21/32" - 1 1/4" 22. PANEL SIDING (TO RAMING) 1/2" (12.7mm) OR LESS 5/8" (16mm) CC-1 NAILING 3-8d 2-8d 16" (406mm)OC 3-16d PER 16" (406mm) 2-16d 4-8d, TOE NAIL OR 2-16d END NAIL 24" (610mm)OC 16" (406mm)OC 8-16d 3-8d 6" (152mm)OC 2-16d 16" (406mm)OC ALONG EACH EDGE 3-8d 4-8d 3-16d 3-16d 3-8d 2-8d 24" (610mm)OC 32" TOP AND BOTTOM, STAGGERED AT ENDS AND AT EACH SPLICE 2-16d AT EACH BEARING - 8d 10d 6d 8d 2x TOP PLATE ROO SHEATHING TOP O JOIST EL SEE PLANS REMARKS SILVER STREET ASHLAND, NE GROUT MINIMUM 8" ABOVE AND BELOW ANCHOR BOLTS BOND BEAM CMU WALL 21 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 2x BLOCKING SIMPSON A34 EACH SIDE END O LOOR OR ROO JOIST 2x8 TOP PLATE SEE ARCH 31 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 S6.1 NO SCALE NO SCALE 41 TYP NON-BEARING WALL DETAIL NO SCALE 1" CLR EQ WOOD JOISTS, SEE PLAN JOIST HANGER, SEE SCHEDULE DOUBLE LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE, SPECIES AND GRADE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD LEDGER & MASONRY LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON A34 EACH BLOCK TOS EL SEE PLANS 1/2"Ø 2'-0" OC COUNTERSUNK STEEL BEAM JOIST OR BLOCKING BETWEEN 2'-0" OC 2-2x4xCONTINUOUS WITH 2-16d NAILS TO JOIST OR BLOCKING. ASTEN 2x4 TOGETHER WITH 2-10d 12" OC BOND BEAM MASONRY WALL (AT MASONRY WALL) LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING 2x BLOCKING 5'-0" MAX END O LOOR OR ROO JOIST 2-2x8 TOP PLATES LOOR/ ROO JOIST 2x4 WITH SIMPSON LUS24 HANGER EACH END PLAN VIEW 4'-0" MAX PLAN VIEW 22 TYP LARGE LOOR/ROO OPENING S6.1 NO SCALE SEE ARCH 32 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 S6.1 NO SCALE 42 TYP SMALL LOOR/ROO OPENING NO SCALE PROVIDE ADDITIONAL JOIST ALONG SIDE O OPENING WHERE SHOWN ON PLANS - SEE PLANS OR SIZE JOIST HANGERS: SIMPSON 2x12 JOISTS SIMPSON LVL JOISTS TOS EL SEE PLANS LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON A34 EACH BLOCK SIMPSON H2.5A EACH SIDE 1/2"Ø 2'-0" OC COUNTERSUNK STEEL BEAM 3'-0" MAX SEE MECHANICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL LOOR/ ROO JOIST DRAWINGS OR OPENING DIMENSION SEE MECHANICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS OR OPENING DIMENSION 1'-4" MAX END O LOOR OR ROO JOIST 2x8 TOP PLATE 23 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE TOP O LEDGER EL SEE PLAN EXISTING BRICK WALL NOTE: JOIST HANGERS TO BE: - SIMPSON DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS - SIMPSON DOUBLE LVL JOISTS 33 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE 43 LOOR RAMING DETAIL S6.1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 8" 8" EQ EQ TOS EL SEE PLANS 1/2"Ø 2'-8" OC COUNTERSUNK STEEL BEAM WOOD JOISTS, SEE PLAN (AT STEEL BEAM) NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS 3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV) ADHESIVE THREADED 1'-4" OC WITH MINIMUM 8" EMBEDMENT LOOR / ROO SHEATHING SIMPSON LUS28 JOIST HANGER AT 2x12 JOISTS; SIMPSON HU9 JOIST HANGER AT 1 3/4x14 LVL JOISTS LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE, SPECIES AND GRADE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD LEDGER & MASONRY EXISTING 2x12 JOISTS 2x LOOR 1'-4" OC EXISTING SUBLOOR AND WOOD LOORING TO REMAIN (IELD VERIY) 3/4" PLYWOOD SUBLOOR (AT EXISTING BRICK WALL) END O LOOR OR ROO JOIST 2-2x8 TOP PLATES 24 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 TOP O LEDGER EL SEE PLAN EXISTING BRICK WALL 2x BLOCKING SIMPSON A34 AT BLOCKING LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING LOOR OR ROO JOIST SIMPSON H2.5A TIE 2-2x8 TOP PLATES 1/2"Ø 2'-0" OC COUNTERSUNK 1/4 3@1'-0" S6.1 NO SCALE 34 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE 44 JOIST BEARING DETAIL NO SCALE 8" 8" EQ EQ TOS EL SEE PLANS 1/2"Ø 2'-8" OC COUNTERSUNK STEEL BEAM (AT 213 OUTDOOR SEATING) NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS LOOR / ROO SHEATHING WOOD JOISTS SEE PLANS 2x 1'-4" OC 3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV) ADHESIVE THREADED 2'-8" OC WITH MINIMUM 8" EMBEDMENT LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE, SPECIES AND GRADE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD LEDGER & MASONRY LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING TOS EL SEE PLANS 2x BLOCKING LOOR OR ROO JOIST SIMPSON A34 EACH BLOCK 1/2"Ø 2'-8" OC COUNTERSUNK 2x8 TOP PLATE 3/8" STIENER 4'-0" OC 1/4 (AT EXISTING BRICK WALL) L8x8x1/2xCONTINUOUS STEEL BEAM 3 SIDES NOTE: TOP PLATE OR TRACK O NON-BEARING STUD WALL GAP 1/2"Ø 2'-8" OC COUNTERSUNK LOOR OR ROO JOIST SIMPSON LB212AZ JOIST HANGER STEEL BEAM USE SIMPSON WNP212-2 JOIST HANGER AT DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS USE SIMPSON LBV1.81/11.25 JOIST HANGER OR 1 3/4x11 1/4 LVLs AT RTU OPENINGS 25 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 S6.1 NO SCALE 35 TYP NON-BEARING WALL DETAIL NO SCALE (AT STEEL BEAM) ROO JOIST OR BLOCKING BETWEEN 4-0 OC SIMPSON 4-0 OC. INSTALL WITH 1/4 GAP BETWEEN WALL TOP PLATE AND ROO JOIST JOIST HANGER SCHEDULE JOIST SIZE HANGER TYPE ANCHOR Ø BOLT SPACING 2x12 SIMPSON LUS28 3/4" 16" OC 3x12 SIMPSON LUS310 7/8" 16" OC 1 3/4"x14" LVL SIMPSON HU9 3/4" 8" OC NOTE: JOIST HANGERS TO BE: - SIMPSON DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS - SIMPSON DOUBLE LVL JOISTS 45 JOIST HANGER SCHEDULE S6.1 NO SCALE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD AND MASONRY BOND BEAM NOTE: USE SIMPSON WNP212-2 JOIST HANGER AT DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS 26 JOIST BEARING DETAIL S6.1 NOTES: (CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE) 1. LOCATE POSITION O NEW COLUMN. 2. DOUBLE UP JOISTS ON EITHER SIDE O JOISTS TO BE CUT. 3. SUPPORT EXISTING LOOR JOISTS, CUT BACK ROM COLUMN CENTERLINE, INSTALL HEADERS WITH HANGERS TO SUPPORT CUT JOISTS. 4. CUT OPENING OR NEW COLUMN IN EXISTING LOOR AND INSTALL COLUMN TO MASONRY PIER AND STEEL RAMING. BASE PLATE AND MASONRY PIER BELOW 5. ADD BLOCKING BETWEEN HEADERS ON EACH SIDE O COLUMN AND BOLT TO COLUMN. 6. REPLACE SUBLOOR AND NAIL TO NEW BLOCKING AND JOISTS. S6.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 36 COLUMN BRACING DETAIL NO SCALE 30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEEN WOOD TOP PLATE AND EXISTING MASONRY EXISTING BRICK WALL. CONTRACTOR REMOVE TOP O EXISTING WALL TO INSTALL TOP PLATE. PROVIDE CLEAN, SMOOTH BEARING SURACE 46 TYP RAMING DETAIL S6.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NEW JOIST SISTERED NEXT TO EXISTING STEEL COLUMN 2-2x12 HEADER WITH SIMPSON LUS28-2 EXISTING JOIST CUT BACK AT COLUMN L3x3x1/4x0'-4" WITH 1/2"Ø A325-N BOLT 3/16 5/8"Ø x 12" ANCHOR 2'-0" OC COUNTERSUNK ROO JOIST SIMPSON LB212AZ JOIST HANGER VERTICAL MASONRY WALL REINORCING WITH STANDARD HOOK AT TOP CMU WALL 2x12 BLOCKING NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PER DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING REQUIREMENTS LOOR / ROO SHEATHING WOOD JOISTS SEE PLANS (AT MASONRY WALL) TOP O EXIST WALL 111'-4 1/2" (V) 3x12 CONTINUOUS TOP PLATE 3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV) ADHESIVE THREADED 2'-0" OC WITH MINIMUM 8" EMBEDMENT (AT EXISTING BRICK WALL) S6.1 STRUCTURAL DETAILS /23/2018 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM Revisions CC-1 3/30/18 AND ADDITION C:\Revit\ _ST_2016_jbergren.rvt 3/30/2018 1:09:32 PM CL STEEL COLUMN BRICK VENEER L8x8x1/2x1'-4" LONG A 1/4" STIENER PLATE STEEL COLUMN L8x8x1/2x1'-4" LONG 1/4" STIENER PLATE 3/16 1/4 1/4 4.5" 51 BRICK SUPPORT AT STEEL COLUMN S6.1 NO SCALE 1" 7" 7" 1" A DETAIL GALVANIZE STEEL AT EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS 3/16 1'-0" 3/16 1'-0" 1' - 9" IELD VERIY 1/2" 1/2" 1/4" BOTTOM PLATE x WIDTH O OPENING, BETWEEN JAMBS. NOTES: (CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE) 1. SAW CUT HORIZONTAL SLOTS IN WALL. EXTEND CUTS 8" ROM EDGE O INTENDED OPENING AT EACH END. 2. INSTALL ANGLES. ANGLES SHALL EXTEND 8" ROM EDGE O INTENDED OPENING AT EACH END. 3. DEMO WALL OR NEW OPENING. 52 LOOSE LINTEL DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE BRICK MASONRY WALL (EXISTING) 2-L8x6x1/2 (LLH). PROVIDE 8" BEARING ON MASONRY JAMBS. BOTTOM EL SEE PLANS EXTERIOR ACE O BUILDING S6.1 NO SCALE REQ'D SPLICE 53 TYP INTERSECTION 1' - 0" (V) 8" MIN EXISTING BRICK WALL DRILL AND EPOXY DOWELS INTO EXISTING WALL AT EACH BOND BEAM BOND 4'-0" OC EXTEND BOND BEAMS 4'-0" INTO BUILDING WALL 1" MIN 2" MAX 54 TYP PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING WOOD JOIST PIPE SUPPORT - SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIICATIONS SPACE PIPE SUPPORTS SUCH THAT MAXIMUM CONCENTRATED LOAD AT JOIST DOES NOT EXCEED 150# (AT PIPE PERPENDICULAR TO WOOD JOIST) 55 TYP PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL S6.1 NO SCALE LOOR OR ROO SHEATHING DOUBLE NUT AND WASHER ABOVE AND BELOW WOOD JOIST 2-2x4 SANDWICHED AROUND HANGER RODS WITH 2-16d NAILS EACH END PIPE SUPPORT - SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIICATIONS. SPACE PIPE SUPPORTS SUCH THAT MAXIMUM LOAD DOES NOT EXCEED 150# (AT PIPE PARALLEL TO WOOD JOIST) CC-1 Architecture Engineering Planning Interiors 2018, DLR Group inc., a Nebraska corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RENOVATION